PMP Handbook

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 214

Search Tips

Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Preface
Part IAn Overview of Projects and Their Effective and Successful
Management
Chapter 1Project Management in Todays World of Business
Project Management Defined
Classical vs. Behavioral Approaches to Managing Projects
The Project Cycle and Tts Phases
Project Success or Failure
Chapter 2A Wedding in Naples: Background Information on Our
Case Study
Organizational Structure
General Nature of the Business
An Opportunity Arises
The Initial Process
Selection of the Project Manager
Questions for Getting Started
Chapter 3The Qualities of Good Leadership
What Leaders Do
When Leadership Falters or Is Missing
Are Leaders Born or Made?
Part IIThe Basic Functions of Project Management
Title
-----------
Chapter 4The Vision Statement and Motivating for Project Success
Providing the Project Vision
Communicating the Vision
Keeping People Pocused on the Vision
Facilitating and Expediting Performance
Motivation to Participate
Team Building
Team Diversity
The Project Manager as a Motivator
Questions for Getting Started
Chapter 5The Statement of Work and the Project Announcement
The Statement of Work
Introduction
Scope
Assumptions
Constraints
Performance Criteria
Product/Service Description
Major Responsibilities
References
Amendments
Signatures
The Project Announcement
Questions for Getting Started
Chapter 6The Work Breakdown Structure
Questions for Getting Started
Chapter 7Techniques for Estimating Work Times
The Benefits and Challenges of Estimating Work Times
Types of Estimating Techniques
Factors to Consider in Drawing Up Estimates
Chapter 8Schedule Development and the Network Diagram
What Scheduling Is
Task Dependencies and Date Scheduling
Perrys Scheduling Method
The Float
Other Types of Network Diagrams
The Schedule as a Road Map
Chapter 9Resource AllocationAligning People and Other
Resources With Tasks
1. Identify the Tasks Involved
2. Assign Resources to Those Tasks
3. Build a Resource Profile
4. Adjust the Schedule or Pursue Alternatives
How Perry Levels the Load
Consultants and Outsources
Summing Up Resource Allocation
Chapter 10Team Organization
Ten Prerequisites for Effective Organization
Types of Organizational Structure
Virtual Teams
SWAT Teams
Self-Directed Work Teams
Chapter 11Budget Development and Cost Calculation
Different Kinds of Costs
Direct vs. Indirect Costs
Recurring vs. Nonrecurring Costs
Fixed vs. Variable Costs
Burdened vs. Nonburdened Labor Rates
Regular vs. Overtime Labor Rates
How to Calculate Costs
What Happens If Cost Estimates Are Too High?
The key: Identifying and Managing Costs
Questions for Getting Started
Chapter 12Risk Management
Managing Risk: A Four-Step Process
Exposure
Categories of risk
Key Concepts in Risk Management
Ways to Handle Risk
Risk Reporting
The Key: Risk Management, Not Elimination
Chapter 13Project Documentation: Procedures, Forms, Memos, and
Such
Procedures
Flowcharts
Forms
Reports
Memos
Newsletters
History files
Project Manual
The Project Library
Determining the Paper Trails Length
Chapter 14Team Dynamics and Successful Interactions
Set Up the Project Office
Conduct Meetings
Give Effective Presentations
Apply Interpersonal Skills
Being an Active Listener
Reading People
Deal With Conflict Effectively
Getting Teamwork to Work
Questions for Getting Started
Chapter 15Performance Assessment: Tracking and Monitoring
Collect Status Data
Methods of Collection
Data Validity and Reliability
Assess Status
Determining Variance
Earned Value
Making Performance Assessment Count
Questions for Getting Started
Chapter 16Quality Assessment: Metrics
Introduction to Metrics
The Collection and Analysis of Data
The Results of Data Analysis
Summing Up Quality Assessment
Chapter 17Managing Changes to the Project
Managing Change
Replanning
Contingency Planning
Summing Up Change Management
Chapter 18Project Closure
Learning From Past Experience
Releasing People and Equipment
Recognizing and Rewarding People
Some Guidelines for Future Projects
Questions for Getting Started
Part IIIProject Management Enhancement
Chapter 19Automated Project Management
Personal Computing Systems
Distributed Integrated System
Telecommuting
Mobile Computing
Groupware Computing
Web Technology
Videoconferencing
Project Automation: Recognizing the Limitations
Questions for Getting Started
Appendix A
Glossary
References
Index
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Preface
Well into the swiftly approaching millennium, project management will continue to be a highly desired skill
in the midst of great change. Because rigid organizational boundaries and responsibilities have blurred and
new technologies are changing the ways of doing business, results must be delivered more quickly and
accurately than ever before. These circumstances call for people who can deal with ambiguity and time
pressures while simultaneously accomplishing project goalsin other words, people who display excellence
in project management.
In this book, we present the route to achieving the knowledge and expertise that will help you display
excellence in project management, on any type of project in any industry. Using a wedding-business case
study, we present the basic principles, tools, and techniques so that readers can easily understand and apply
the material.
Starting with Chapter 2, youll learn the six basic functions of project management. Youll learn how to:
1.Lead a project throughout its cycle; its so important that it is the first topic.
2.Define a projects goals and objectives so everyone agrees on the results and knows success when
they see it.
3.Plan a project in a way that results in a road map that people will confidently follow, not just the
project manager.
4.Organize a project in a manner that increases the efficiency and effectiveness of the team, resulting
in greater productivity.
5.Control a project so that its momentum and direction are not overtaken by scope creep.
6.Close a project in a manner so that it lands smoothly rather than crashes.
The book comprises three major parts. Part I establishes the fundamentals of project management, with an
overview of the field today, provides information on the wedding case study, and provides a general look at
what constitutes leadership. Part II is the heart of the volume, with chapters covering the key issues that face
project managers today. Based on the six functions just listed, these chapters discuss setting up your project
structure, assessing its progress, and achieving its goals. We cover such topics as working with new teaming
structures and styles, motivating people, estimating costs, and dealing with change. At the end of each chapter
Title
-----------
is a series of questions that will help you apply your new knowledge to an existing or upcoming project.
Part III contains additional tips, such as how to work with new technologies and how to manage or decrease
risk. The Appendix material refers to the case study, the Glossary is a quick reference to special terms, and the
References are suggestions for further reading.
The authors have applied the principles, tools, and techniques in this book successfully in a wide variety of
projects: audit, construction, documentation, engineering, information systems, insurance, manufacturing,
support services/help desk, and telecommunications projects, as well as in other environments. The book is
based on our combined experience of more than fifty years in business management, operations, and
information systems. As the founders and executives of the consulting firm Practical Creative Solutions, Inc.,
of Redmond, Washington, we offer products, services, and training programs designed to meet the special
needs of our varied clients.
Project management worksif you know what it is and how to do it. After reading this book, you will be able
to join the ranks of effective and successful project managers.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Part I
An Overview of Projects and Their Effective and
Successful Management
Chapter 1
Project Management in Todays World of Business
The project manager has never had a tougher job. Companies are always in transition now, remodeling and
reorganizing to meet the latest global challenges. Competition is keen and only the flexible will survive.
These business conditions translate directly to the greater demands for efficient, effective management of an
entire spectrum of projects.
For example, a rise in use of distributed systems technology (e.g., client/server, Intranet, and Internet
computing) and telecommuting has accelerated the disappearance of organizational boundaries and
hierarchical management levels. Along with this blurring of organizational levels has come employee
empowerment. Many companies now grant employees greater responsibilities and decision-making authority
(e.g., self-directed work teams).
And the changes just dont stop. Many companies view projects as investments, integral parts of their
strategic plans. This means the project managers must continually demonstrate their contribution to the
bottom line. With this alliance between strategic plan and project management comes an increasingly close
but often tense relationship between project and process management. Contrary to popular belief, project
management and process management are compatible; projects become integral players in using and
implementing processes. But failure to effectively manage a key project could cause a malfunction in the core
process! This relationship between process and project management also manifests itself in a need to integrate
multiple projects when they involve common core processes, thus requiring even greater integration to ensure
such processes are not adversely affected.
The nature of todays workforce has changed in many companies. Employees are no longer offered or seek
long-term employmentmany people and companies want flexibility or mobility. Such changes add a new
Title
-----------
dimension to the work being done on a projecta dimension that directly affects relationships and ways of
doing business. And many projects now involve people from different occupations and backgrounds. The
globalization of the nations business, for instance, requires that a project managers skills go beyond being
able to put together a flowchart.
As the economy continues to expand, key resources will become limited and project managers will need
alternative ways to obtain expertise, such as by using consultants and outsourcing. Certainly, project
managers in the past have faced similar problems of providing alternative sources of expertisebut never on
as great a scale as they do today.
Market pressures complicate the management of projects, too. Customers not only want a quality product but
also want it sooner. Time-to-market pressures force project managers to be efficient and effective to an
unprecedented degree. The complexity involved in managing projects has never been greater and will likely
only grow in the future. So, too, will the risks for failure. It is more critical than ever that the pieces of the
project be in place to ensure delivery of the final service on time and within budget and to guarantee that it be
of the highest quality.
Tom Peters, the great management consultant, was correct when he said that project management is the skill
of the 1990s. But it is the skill of the future as well. The need for managing projects efficiently and effectively
has never been greater and so are the rewards for its success. But having good project management practices
in place will no longer suffice; what is required now is excellence in project management if project success is
to be the norm.
Project Management Defined
Despite a changing project environment, the fundamental tools of project management remain the same
regardless of project or industry. For example, managing a marketing project requires the same skills as
managing a software engineering project.
But what is a project? What is project management? A project is a discrete set of activities performed in a
logical sequence to attain a specific result. Each activity, and the entire project, has a start and stop date.
Project management is the tools, techniques, and processes for defining, planning, organizing, controlling,
and leading a project as it completes its tasks and delivers the results. But lets take a closer look at the
functions of project management just mentioned.
Lead To inspire the participants to accomplish the goals and objectives at a level that meets or
exceeds expectations. It is the only function of project management that occurs simultaneously with the
other functions. Whether defining, planning, organizing, or controling, the project manager uses
leadership to execute the project efficiently and effectively.
Introducing Project Management
The top management in some companies does not understand that project management is what is
needed. How do you convince people that project management will help them?
Introducing project management is a change management issue, even a paradigm shift. Thats
because project management disciplines will affect many policies, procedures, and processes. They
will also affect technical, operational, economic, and human resources issues. Such changes can be
dramatic, and many peopleas in many change effortswill resist or embrace change, depending on
how it is perceived.
Here are some steps for introducing project management within an organization.
1.Build an awareness of project management. You can distribute articles and books on the
subject and attend meetings sponsored by the Project Management Institute and the American
Management Association.
2.Establish a need for project management. Identify opportunities for applying project
management, particularly as a way to solve problems. Collect data on previous project
performance and show statistically and anecdotally how project management would have
improved results.
3.Benchmark. You can compare your organizations experience with projects to that of
companies that have used project management.
4.Find a sponsor. No matter what case you can make for project management, you still need
someone with enough clout to support its introduction.
5.Select a good pilot. Avoid taking on too much when introducing the idea of project
management. Select a project thats not too visible but also one that people care about. The
project serves as a proving ground for your new ideas.
6.Communicate the results. As the project progresses, let management know about its
successes and failures. Profile the project as a lessons learned experience.
7.Provide consultation on other projects. With the expertise acquired on your pilot project,
apply your knowledge to other projects. Your advice will enable others to see the value of
project management.
Define To determine the overall vision, goals, objectives, scope, responsibilities, and deliverables of a
project. A common way to capture this information is with a statement of work. This is a document that
delineates the above information and is signed by all interested parties.
Plan To determine the steps needed to execute a project, assign who will perform them, and identify
their start and completion dates. Planning entails activities such as constructing a work breakdown
structure and a schedule for start and completion of the project.
Organize To orchestrate the resources cost-effectively so as to execute the plan. Organizing involves
activities such as forming a team, allocating resources, calculating costs, assessing risk, preparing
project documentation, and ensuring good communications.
Control To assess how well a project meets its goals and objectives. Controlling involves collecting
and assessing status reports, managing changes to baselines, and responding to circumstances that can
negatively impact the project participants.
Close To conclude a project efficiently and effectively. Closing a project involves compiling
statistics, releasing people, and preparing the lessons learned document.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Classical vs. Behavioral Approaches to Managing Projects
The field of project management is currently in transition. What worked in the past may not necessarily work
in the future, precisely because the world of business has changed. In the past, managing a project meant
focusing on three key elements of a project: cost, schedule, and quality. Each element had a direct relationship
with the other two. Do something to one and the other two would be affected, positively or negatively. This
viewpoint is considered the classical approach for managing projects. The classical approach emphasized the
formal, structural aspects. Managing projects meant building neat organizational charts and highly logical
schedules, as well as using formal decision-making disciplines.
Recently, however, project management has taken a more behavioral approach. The emphasis is shifting
toward viewing a project as a total system, or subsystem operating within a system. This system perspective
emphasizes the human aspects of a project as much as the structural ones. This does not mean that the formal
tools, techniques, and principles are less important; it is just that they share the stage with behavioral
techniques. The three elementscost, schedule, and qualitygain an added dimension: people. Cost,
schedule, quality, and people all play integral roles in the success or failure of a project.
Indeed, it is quite evident that the behavioral aspects of a project can have an impact on final results.
Individual and team motivations, informal power structures, and interpersonal communications can have as
much an effect as a poorly defined schedule or an ill-defined goal. In many cases, the impact of behavioral
problems can be even more dramatic.
The Project Cycle and Tts Phases
In the classical approach, project management was conceived in a linear way, or was at least formally
portrayed that way. Project managers were to define, plan, organize, control, and closein that order. While
it made sense, the reality was usually something else.
Today, we view the project managers role differently; although project managers perform the same functions,
we perceive their performance not in a linear context but in a cyclical one, as shown in Exhibit 1-1. Each time
the cycle completes (reaches closure), it begins again, requiring the reinstitution or refinement of the functions
that were used in a previous cycle.
Title
-----------
Exhibit 1-1.Functions of project management.
Notice the word lead in the middle of the cycle. As noted earlier, this function occurs throughout the project
life cycle and plays a prominent role in each iteration of the cycle. It is the centerfocusto ensure that each
function occurs efficiently and effectively.
The typical project cycle consists of phases that result in output. During the concept phase, the idea of a
project arises and preliminary cost and schedule estimates are developed at a high level to determine if the
project not only is technically feasible but also will have a payback. In the formulation phase, the complete
project plans are developed. These plans often include a statement of work, a work breakdown structure, and
schedules.
The implementation phase is when the plan is executed. Energy is expended to achieve the goals and
objectives of the project in the manner prescribed during the formulation phase. Then, in the installation
phase, the final product is delivered to the customer. At this point, considerable training and administrative
support are provided to please the customer.
The sustaining phase covers the time the product, such as a computing system or a building, is under the
customers control and an infrastructure exists to maintain and enhance the product. Sometimes these phases
occur linearly; other times, they overlap. Still other times they occur in a spiral, as shown in Exhibit 1-2.
In todays fast-paced environment, partly owing to time-to-market pressures and partly to a rapidly changing
business environment, theres pressure to accelerate the project cycle without sacrificing quality. Many
projects are on the fast track, meaning they proceed quickly. To accommodate that acceleration, companies
adopt simplistic, modular approaches
Exhibit 1-2.Phases of project management.
to building a new product or delivering a new service. Component-based manufacturing, reuse, and
just-in-time delivery, as well as more sophisticated tools (e.g., in-systems development) for building products,
enable such fast-tracking to become possible and prevalent.
Project Success or Failure
Projects, of course, are not operated in a vacuum. They are parts, or subsystems, of much bigger systems
called businesses. Each project has or uses elements such as processes, participants, policies, procedures, and
requirements, some of which are dependent upon and interact with related elements in the larger business
system. A conflict between project and system can result in disequilibrium. But by taking a systems
perspective, the project manager can see how all the elements interact, and assess the impact on the individual
project. For example, it becomes easier to understand the impact of a 10 percent budget cut on each element
of a project. More important, it is easier to identify potential project failure by recognizing the disequilibrium.
If left unmanaged, disequilibrium can result in project failure.
So what types of disequilibrium make a project a success or failure? In the past, the view was that failure
resulted from not adequately defining, planning, organizing, or controlling the project in a step-by-step
manner. In many cases, a projects failure was attributed to not having an adequate statement of work, a work
breakdown structure, or a schedule. But, as mentioned earlier, failure of a project is increasingly seen as a
result of bad behavioral circumstancesfor example, poor customer commitment, lack of vision, low morale,
no buymin from people doing the work, or unrealistic expectations. Such behavioral factors are frequently
recognized as having as much importance for project success, for example, as a well-defined work breakdown
structure. Exhibit 1-3 shows some common reasons for project success or failure.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


The key, of course, is being able to recognize if and when projects start to fail. To do that requires
maintaining a feedback loop throughout the project cycle. And the effectiveness of the feedback loop depends
on a constant flow of quality information among the project manager, team members, the customer, and
senior management; see Exhibit 1-4. Well discuss this in greater depth in Chapters 13, 14, and 19.
Based on the case study presented in the next chapter, you will learn how to apply the basic functions of
project management throughout the cycle of a typical project. Chapters 4 through 17 will walk you through
the process, showing the major assessments and decisions to be made. At the end of each chapter is a set of
questions you can answer on your own to help you apply the principles and techniques that you have learned.
So begin now, by meeting the CEO of Great Weddings, Inc., and the project the company is about to launch.
Exhibit 1-3. Reasons for project failures and successes.
Reasons for Project Failures
Classical Behavioral
Ill-defined work breakdown structure Inappropriate leadership style
High-level schedule No common vision
No reporting infrastructure Unrealistic expectations
Too pessimistic or optimistic estimates Poor informal communications and interpersonal
relationships
No change management discipline No "buy-in" or commitment from customer or people
doing work
Inadequate formal communications Low morale
Inefficient allocation of resources Lack of training
No accountability and responsibility for results Poor teaming
Title
-----------
Poor role definition Culture not conducive to project management
Inadequacy of tools Lack of trust among participants
Ill-defined scope False or unrealistic expectations
Unclear requirements No or weak executive sponsorship
Too high, too long, or too short time frame Mediocre knowledge transfer
Reasons for Project Successes
Classical Behavioral
Well-defined goals and objectives Agreement over goals and objectives
Detailed work breakdown structure Commitment to achieving goals and objectives
Clear reporting relationships High morale
Formal change management disciplines in place Good teaming
Channels of communication exist Cooperation among all participants
Adherence to scope Receptivity to positive and negative feedback
Reliable estimating Receptive culture to project management
Reliable monitoring and tracking techniques Realistic expectations
Clear requirements Good conflict resolution
Reasonable time frame Executive sponsorship
Broad distribution of work Good customer-supplier relationship
Exhibit 1-4.Feedback loop.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 2
A Wedding in Naples: Background Information on Our
Case Study
Here is the case study that forms the backbone of this handbook. It is a model situation around which we have
built our guidelines for effective and successful project management, using the functions of leading, defining,
planning, organizing, controlling, and closing.
Great Weddings, Inc. (GWI), located in New York City, provides a full line of wedding services: sending
announcements to friends, relatives, and newspapers; providing prewedding parties and rehearsals (e.g.,
bachelor parties and bridal showers); determining the ceremony and reception locations; arranging for travel
and hotel accommodations, food and beverages; preparing and mailing invitations; providing wedding attire,
flowers, sound, lighting, music, entertainment, decorations and props, photography and videotaping;
coordinating wedding transportation; and preparing the wedding feast and cake.
GWI provides wedding services in fourteen states. In 1997, its revenue was $5 million after it was in business
for seven years. Amelia Rainbow is president and CEO of GWI, which is privately owned, and she holds 100
percent of the stock.
Growth for the business has been slowing in recent years, from 10 percent annually three years ago to 2
percent this year. If this trend continues, the business could stagnateor, worse, it might have to reduce
services.
Organizational Structure
Amelia Rainbow has several department heads at vice-presidential levels reporting to her. Each department
has a corporate staff reporting to her. All weddings are managed out of its corporate headquarters in New
York City. The organizational structure of GWI is shown in Exhibit 2-1.
Title
-----------
General Nature of the Business
GWI frequently receives solicitations for proposals. These requests are for weddings of all sizes and religions.
A proposal request is a formal document sent to potential vendors. It states the requirements and expectations
of the client, as well as the terms and conditions of the contract. A reply to a proposal request provides
vendors with the opportunity to describe the who, what, when, where, and how for meeting the proposals
request.
A proposal has three major components: technical, management, and cost. The technical component includes:
Vendors experience/expertise with similar projects
List of equipment
Photographs of end products
Services
Exhibit 2-1.GWI organizational chart.
Standards (e.g., levels of acceptance)
Technical approach
The management component includes:
Background
Facilities
Legal/contracts
Operating plan
Organizational structure
Project management methodology/approach
Program/project plan (to achieve goals and objectives)
Rsum of cadre (key) personnel
Resource allocation
Schedule
Statement of work
Subcontract work (e.g., names of subcontractors and experience/expertise)
The cost component includes:
Cost for subcontract work (e.g., labor rates, equipment rental)
Options
Payment schedule
Price breakout (for services and products)
Taxes
Type of contract (e.g., lump sum, fixed price)
Warranties
There are three types of proposal requests: letter request, request for information, and request for proposal.
The major difference among them is the level of effort and resources needed for a response and commitment
upon notification of winning the contract. A letter request briefly conveys the needs of the client. A request
for information usually seeks clarification about specific areas of technology. It does not require the vendor to
provide any services or render any commitments. It often precedes an opportunity to respond to a request for
proposal. And a request for proposal is a detailed, complex contract opportunity. High costs and levels of
effort are necessary to prepare and respond to it.
An Opportunity Arises
One day, GWI receives a request to host a large wedding from the Smythes, a wealthy American family. The
Smythes recently returned from a two-week trip to Naples, Italy, where they fell in love with the city. Their
oldest daughter, Karen, also recently accepted a marriage proposal from her longtime boyfriend, John Hankle,
who accompanied the family on their Naples trip. Everyone has agreed to hold the wedding in Naples.
Amelia recognizes that the wedding could provide the opportunity to open up a niche that GWI had until now
not tappedAmerican wedding firms providing services in other countries. Such a wedding would be
unprecedented, both in location and in size. Amelia knows, however, that it will enable GWI to avoid
stagnation and grow in a highly competitive industry.
Amelia realizes that she has no choice but to use the existing infrastructure to handle such an unprecedented
project. The entire wedding will also be competing with other ongoing wedding activities. Such weddings,
too, are considered unprecedented opportunities, meaning that hiring more staff now might mean later laying
off people or absorbing costs that could hurt GWI in the future. Amelia also recognizes that this wedding
must be treated more carefully than most because of its high visibility and the amount of money being spent.
The wedding, she knows, is an excellent candidate for applying solid project management disciplines. The
wedding itself has all the criteria for being a project. It has a defined product, which is a wedding. It has
definite start and stop dates. It has a sequence of activities that are required to make the wedding a reality.
Finally, it is temporary. Once the wedding is overunless, of course, the idea catches onpeople and other
resources will be returned to normal business life.
The Initial Process
Prior to responding to the wedding request, Amelia forms a proposal team to develop the response. She
appoints a proposal manager, Dave Renberg. Dave forms a team of wedding experts and a technical writer.
Dave and his team verify that the wedding will support the strategic plan. Then they conduct an internal
assessment to determine whether GWI has the capabilities to support the project and it does. Next, they
perform an assessment to determine the risks that GWI might face if it takes on the project and what measures
to employ to prevent or mitigate those risks. GWI finds it has the capabilities to respond to the risks, although
they stretch the company to the limits.
The team is then ready for the next step: prepare the proposal. After the team completes the first draft, Dave
establishes an internal review team to critique the proposal. The internal review team consists of people with
finance, legal, and wedding backgrounds. After several iterations, the proposal is available for Amelias
signature. After carefully reviewing its contents, Amelia signs the proposal. Within a week, she receives
notification that GWI has won the contract with the Smythe family.
What Type of Project Manager Are You?
In Corporate Pathfinders (New York: Penguin Books, 1987), Harold J. Leavitt identifies three types of
managers in an organizational setting: problem solvers, implementers, and pathfinders.
1.The manager who is a problem solver emphasizes the use of reasoning, logic, and analysis. A key
characteristic is reliance on facts and data.
2.The manager who is an implementer emphasizes the use of action through people. A key
characteristic is reliance on human emotions and persuasion.
3.The manager who is a pathfinder emphasizes the use of visioning. A key characteristic is the
importance placed on values and beliefs.
If a project requires vision, then choose a pathfinder as leader. If a project requires trouble fixing or hard
logical analysis (e.g., defining requirements and specifications), then a problem solver would make the best
choice. If a project requires a person with good people skills, then an implementer would be the best choice.
The next issue for Amelia to address is to determine at what hierarchical level within the company the project
should be placed and what its most appropriate structure is. One criterion is to give the project as much
visibility as possible. She wants to communicate its priority. With other wedding projects occurring
simultaneously, it is easy to forget this priority.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


She decides to establish a steering committee to oversee the overall performance of the project. This steering
committee will consist of all the vice-presidents, or their representatives, with Sam Herkle of Quality as chair.
The purposes of the steering committee are to provide general oversight of and guidance to the project. The
steering committee will have a dotted-line relationship to Amelia, as shown in Exhibit 2-2.
Amelia next decides to adopt a matrix structure for the project itself. Although the project manager would be
at the vice-presidential level, the resources must be borrowed from other organizations until the demand for
this type of wedding increases in number, value, and longevity. The matrix structure enables her to tape the
expertise of functional groups and use people on a temporary basis. While completing the Smythe Project,
they could also support other wedding projects.
Exhibit 2-2.Organizational placement of Smythe Project.
Amelia does, however, consider a task force structure for the project. This structure involves assigning people
as dedicated members to a projectmeaning they support no other project. That would require removing
people from other important projects and hiring replacements, which in turn means layoffs later on. She
realizes, though, that a task force structure would grant the project more visibility and autonomy. The
shortage of skills, the need for supporting existing weddings, and the temporary and risky nature of the project
make the matrix structure the most appropriate selection. See Exhibit 2-3 for a comparison of these structure
types.
Selection of the Project Manager
The final initial step is to select the right person to serve as project manager. Amelia recognizes the
importance of selecting the right personhis or her qualities have a direct impact on the outcome of the
wedding. Thats why she looks first and foremost at the leadership qualities of the person. After all, many
qualified people can do the mechanics of project management, but not everyone is a project leader.
After making a few mistakes in the past, Amelia has learned that the technically competent person is not
necessarily a competent project leader. A person may have the best logical and analytical mind in the group
Title
-----------
and yet lack the qualities that lead a project to a successful conclusion. Because the project manager must
interact with many people (such as sponsors, senior management, client, and team members), it is important
that that person have good people skills. These skills include:
Exhibit 2-3. Task vs. matrix structure.
Task Structure Matrix Structure
Advantages Advantages
Autonomous
Dedicated resources
Greater control over people
Greater decision-making authority
High visibility
Access to expertise not ordinarily available
Flexibility in adopting to changing
circumstances
Less idle time for team members
Fewer morale problems as project concludes
Disadvantages Disadvantages
Impacted by turnover
Less flexibility to adapt to changing
circumstances
Threat to morale as project winds down
Conflict with other projects of higher priority
High stress due to conflicting demands
Less autonomy
Less control over people
Less decision-making authority
Active listening
Business orientation
Coaching
Communication
Conflict resolution
Cross-functional thinking
Customer orientation
Delegation
Diversity orientation
Facilitation
Interviewing
Mediation
Meetings management
Negotiation
Networking
Political savvy
Power of persuasion
Priority setting
Sensitivity
Successful delivery of product
Team building
Time management
Of course, she also recognizes the need for additional skills:
Communications (writing and public speaking)
Computer literacy
Knowledge of human resource management, procurement, and quality
Legal affairs
Organizational
Planning
Product/technical knowledge
Risk management
Statistics and mathematics
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Finally, Amelia recognizes that the project manager must have certain personality characteristics:
Analytical
Can deal with uncertainty and ambiguity
Conceptual
Creative
Delivers a product or service
Exhibits courage
Facilitates
Flexible and adaptable
Has high ethical standards
Has self-confidence
Has self-control
Innovative
Looks at the overall picture
Maintains accountability
Maintains credibility
Makes decisions
Mediates
Remains open-minded
Self-reliant and independent
Solves problems
Stays focused
Takes risks
Trustworthy
Understands legal matters
Willing to change and provide recognition
Title
-----------
The Power of the Project Manager
Power is often defined as the ability to influence key players in the decision-making process to achieve a
goal. In other words, power means getting what one wants.
Project managers often feel powerless because they lack the powers of functional managers, such as hiring
and firing. While true, they are not as powerless as they think. According to management theorists John
French and Bertram Raven, five different sources of power exist. Each applies to varying extents to the
project manager.
Coercive power uses fear as a primary tool. It involves inflicting punishment. Project managers
usually have little coercive power in an overt sense. On a more subtle level, however, they may not
assign certain people to coveted tasks, not invite them to meetings, or not communicate with them.
Reward power uses positive financial and nonmonetary tools. Most project managers lack the
power to use monetary incentives. However, they can provide feedback to functional managers on
performance, which in turn provides a basis for determining salary increases. Project managers can
also pay for training and dispense other perks. From a nonmonetary perspective, they can reward
people by assigning them to high-visibility tasks, as well as involve them in the decision-making
process.
Legitimate power is the authority granted by the institution. In other words, such power allows
managers to order people with the full backing of the institution. Project managers, especially in a
matrix environment, lack this powerthey must use other power sources. Still, they have some
legitimate power, especially if they have the political support of a powerful senior manager.
Expert power is based on a persons knowledge credentials, expertise, or education. Project
managers are often chosen for these characteristics and they gain considerable power in this regard.
The only problem is that project managers often become narrowly focused, failing to see the big
picture and working on other key areas. In addition, they have power only as long as people respect
those characteristics.
Referent power is based on trait theorythat is, a persons characteristics. These project managers
have certain characteristics that make people want to follow them. An example of such a trait is
charisma.
In the end, she wants someone who can lead groups of people as well as individuals, provide a vision of what
the project is to achieve, be able to communicate effectively, ensure that people stay focused on the vision,
motivate people to participate, and facilitate and expedite performance. After conversations with executives
on the steering committee and after reviewing the performance records of prospective candidates, Amelia
selects Perry Fitzberg as the project manager.
At this point, you have seen the initial steps taken by senior management in assessing the worth of the project,
evaluating its prospects for success, and establishing the responsibility for project management. Review the
following questions, then move on to Chapter 3, where the qualities of project leadership are considered from
a broad perspective.
Questions for Getting Started
1.What type of organizational structure does your project have? Is it task force? Matrix?
2.What soft skills will you need to lead your project? Do you know what areas to improve upon?
3.What hard skills will you need to lead your project? Do you know what areas to improve upon?
4.What aspects of your personality will prove useful in leading your project? Do you know what
aspects to improve upon?
5.How will you provide a vision of what the project is to achieve?
6.Do you communicate effectively?
7.How will you ensure that people stay focused on the vision?
8.Do you have ideas for motivating people to participate?
9.Can you facilitate and expedite their performance?
10.What ideas do you have for leading groups of people?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 3
The Qualities of Good Leadership
Our concept of leadership has evolved over the years. The term was once confused with management, but
today the two are distinct roles, each with its own characteristics. Rather than debate a definition of
leadership, it is advantageous to discuss what leaders do. That way, you can come around to a better, fuller
understanding of the concept.
What Leaders Do
It is increasingly clear that leaders do more than plan, organize, control, coordinate, and budget. While such
activities are important and must be done, project leadership goes beyond those functions. In other words,
leadership involves more than being logical, analytical, and sequentialthat is, its more than simply
applying the mental thought processes originating in the left side of the brain.
Leadership takes on a holistic perspective by including the people side in project management, and it
embraces the future rather than preserves the status quo. Thus, leadership is dynamic rather than static. It
involves looking at the present and determining the steps to move on to some desired future state (e.g., a
vision buttressed with meaningful goals that serve as guideposts). Leadership, not surprisingly, requires being
results-oriented. By developing a vision and goals, the project leader gives the team a sense of purpose. The
leader also helps align people and other resources to focus on achieving results, thereby increasing project
efficiency and effectiveness. Consequently, the emphasis is on what and why rather than how. At all times,
judgments are based on the big picture, which is the vision.
Leadership embraces change. It requires constantly asking, What are we doing? Is that the only way to do it?
Can we do it better? Questioning the status quo is characteristic of leadership. It requires viewing a
constantly changing environment while pursuing the vision. This emphasis on change therefore requires a
willingness to adopt new processes, procedures, and roles if they will more efficiently and effectively help
attain the vision. Flexibility and adaptability are two characteristics of good leadership.
Leadership means the ability to motivate. Contemporary leadership theories and practices emphasize the
people side. Leadership entails active listening techniques in conflict management, reading people to
Title
-----------
understand their messages and motives, negotiating through open communication, and thinking outside the
box, all in an effort to attain the vision.
From a motivational perspective, leadership is getting people to perform enthusiastically, confidently, and in a
highly committed way. It implies delegating, empowering, coaching, building trust, handling diversity (people
from different cultures and disciplines), laying the groundwork for creativity, and facilitating performance.
Leadership involves communicating. Communication is not just giving effective presentations; it is also
listening to the want to hears and the need to hears. It requires communicating laterally and vertically in a
manner that is open and engenders trust. It means being open and honest at all timesthat is, creating an
atmosphere of trust, where hidden agendas and dishonesty have no place. All decisions and behaviors are of
the highest ethical standards, to ensure credibility and trustworthiness up, down, and across the chain of
command.
Leadership requires a constancy of purpose. It means keeping the vision in the forefront of everyones mind
by continually asking the question, How will this help to achieve the vision? That translates to being
results-oriented and aligning responses and processes in a focused, disciplined manner.
Here, too, leadership involves a willingness to take smart, calculated risks. Leaders look for better ways not
only to conduct business but also to take action. They embrace ambiguity and complexity in a manner that
fosters innovative ideas and solutions to achieve the vision. They build cohesive teams that have synergy.
Team members share information and other resources in a way that encourages cross-functional participation.
Leaders build an atmosphere of trust and mutual support, emphasizing relational rather than hierarchical
interactions and directing team energy toward achieving the vision. Thus, leadership means facilitating rather
than impeding performance. Leaders help people do their jobs in a positive, not negative, way. They remove
obstacles to performance, not create them. They secure the resources. However, they do more. They can
maneuver through the halls of power, network with key players, and interact with the customer to ensure
satisfaction of all requirements and specifications. In addition, they can be political if it furthers the interests
of the project.
Finally, leaders put the customer first. They strive to understand everything about the customerfor example,
needs, tastes, and relevant market conditions. The customer is king and drives the vision; without that focus
on the vision, the project becomes quixotic.
When Leadership Falters or Is Missing
Leadership encourages greater productivity. An experienced team member or project manager only has to
work once on a project to understand the difference between a project with leadership and one without it. But
being a project manager has never been harder. The days of managing the team with thou shalts, with the
support of a clearly designed organizational structure and rational, logical discipline, are over. Good project
managers know the value of exercising effective leadership throughout the project cycle. They know that the
leader must inspire the team to accomplish goals and objectives at a level that meets, even exceeds,
expectations.
That is not as simple as it sounds. The people to be inspired are not just the ones working directly on the
project. They are also the ones whom the leader reports to (e.g., customer and senior management) and those
who support the project for a short period of time (e.g., contract employees and consultants). With all these
players, in a constantly changing environment, effective leadership is critical.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Although leadership is important for a project, it rarely is seen on some projects. The reasons for this are
many, and are worth noting.
1.There is a tendency to select people solely for their technical expertise. While expertise is important,
it is a mistake to assume that expertise is equivalent to leadership. Leadership goes beyond technical
prowess, increasingly recognized as subordinate to other qualities. Often, a person selected for his or
her technical expertise relies on that quality at the expense of the project.
2.There is a failure to distinguish between project leadership and project management. Project
management deals with the mechanics of managing a project, such as building a schedule; project
leadership deals with much bigger issuesfor example, ensuring that people focus on the vision. (See
box on page 25.)
3.There is a tendency to wear blinders. In a complex, constantly changing environment, many project
managers seek security by grabbing on to a small piece rather than looking at the big picture. They may
focus, for example, solely on technical issues or on the schedule at the expense of more important
areas.
4.There is a tendency to be heroic. That is, they try to do everything themselves and be all things to all
people. They eventually start to overcontrol and in the end, as many experienced project managers
know, control very little, even themselves. They fail, for example, to delegate.
5.There is a tendency to emphasize hard rather than soft skills. Hard skills are scheduling and
statistical analysis; soft skills are active listening and writing. It is not uncommon for project managers
of technical projects to disparagingly refer to soft skills as touchy-feely. Yet time and again, studies
have shown that soft skills can prove as critical, indeed more so, in a projects success.
6.There is a tendency to select project managers based on the FBI (Friends, Brothers, and In-laws)
principle. Senior managers often select people they like or who are like themselves, who may or may
not have the attributes of a project leader.
7.There is a tendency by senior management to micromanage a project. They treat the project as a pet,
smothering it with attention, thereby killing any initiative by the project manager or the team. An
example is requiring any action, even the smallest, to have approval from senior management. Such an
oppressive atmosphere makes it impossible to exercise project leadership.
8.There is a failure to recognize that leadership is ongoing. It starts at the beginning and continues
throughout the project cycle. Yet especially with long-term projects, managers tend to forget about
Title
-----------
inspiring people and their leadership assumes a posture of benign neglect.
9.There is a tendency to ignore or not recognize the indicators of poor leadership. These indicators
include a high turnover or absenteeism rate among team members, repetitive problems with the quality
of output, and constant slippage of major milestone dates. Of course, these indicators may reflect other
problems; however, theres a high correlation between problems in leadership and those in
performance.
10.There is a tendency toward window dressing rather than dealing with substantive issues. Window
dressing concentrates on images; substantive issues probe the root causes. While looking good has its
immediate advantages, too much emphasis on image can have deleterious effects as the underlying
problems persist and become more acute.
Project Management vs. Project Leadership
Is there a difference between project management and project leadership?
Project management uses the tools, knowledge, and techniques needed for defining, planning, organizing,
controlling, leading, and closing a project. Project leadership appears, therefore, to be a subset of project
management. But it would be a mistake to assume that project leadership is secondary to project
management. Project leadership is the only function that occurs throughout the project cycle. It is, in many
ways, the glue that holds the other functions together. The output from defining, planning, organizing,
controlling, and closing a project depends largely on how well project leadership is exhibited. Without solid
leadership, performance of the other functions will be marginal at best.
Industries are replete with examples of projects that had well-defined plans and plenty of financial support,
yet achieved less than satisfactory results. Project managers must gain and retain the confidence of myriad
players, including the project sponsor, client, team, and senior management. Project leadership, then, means
going beyond the mechanics of managing a project, such as building a work breakdown structure,
constructing schedules, or managing change. It calls for inspiring all players to accomplish the goals and
objectives in a manner that meets or exceeds expectations.
Are Leaders Born or Made?
For a long time, people have debated whether leaders were born or made. The issue remains relatively
unsettled, although most management experts believe that leaders are made rather than born. Basically, there
are three theories of leadership: trait theories, situational contingency theories, and personal behavior theories.
1.Trait theorists say that people contain characteristics that make them leaders. These characteristics
could be based on personality, internal motivations, physical features, or a combination of two or more.
2.Situational contingency theorists deal with different leadership styles under varying circumstances.
Typical leadership styles are either task or people centered and, depending on the circumstances, one
style is preferable to another.
3.Personal behavior theorists deal with views on how leaders perceive people and their role in an
organization. Some managers stress the people side while others emphasize the mission.
Regardless of approach, the contemporary viewpoint is that managers in general and project managers in
particular stress people rather than task completion. So if you are currently a project manageror strive to
become onekeep the leadership qualities discussed in this chapter foremost in your mind.
It is our hope, of course, that you will avoid these pitfalls and become an effective, successful project leader.
Part II begins with the initial steps of project management and concludes with a chapter on closure. The latter
discusses how to learn from past mistakes so that future projects will have successful outcomes.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Part II
The Basic Functions of Project Management
Chapter 4
The Vision Statement and Motivating for Project
Success
Perry Fitzberg, newly appointed manager for GWIs Smythe Project, knows all too well that leadership
involves more than just building schedules and calculating budgets. As project manager it will be his job to:
1.Provide a vision of what the project is to achieve.
2.Communicate that vision to all involved.
3.Ensure that everyone stays focused on that vision.
4.Motivate people to participate in the project.
5.Facilitate and expedite performance.
6.Build an effective team.
But lets examine each of these points, one at a time.
Providing the Project Vision
From a project management perspective, the vision describes what the project is to achieve. It is often a
high-level statement supported by a list of goals and objectives. The vision is essentially an idea of some
desired end state, expressed in a form that everyone understands, can relate to, and can feel a sense of
commitment to.
Perry knows that the vision should be clear, concise, and direct. He used several sources to draft the
statement, including the minutes of meetings and the formal contract with the customer. Perry also knows that
the vision statement will require commitment by people working directly and indirectly on the project. To
Title
-----------
engender this commitment, he solicits feedback to make revisions where appropriate. This helps generate
commitment, encourages raising important questions, and possibly addresses communciation problems before
they can negatively impact the project. Exhibit 4-1 is his vision statement for the Smythe Project.
Having a vision statement at the outset offers several advantages:
1.It clearly formulates in peoples minds what the project is to achieve. In other words, it
communicates the scope of the project, helping to avoid scope creep, that is, unintentional expansion
of the projects boundaries.
2.It provides a basis for managing the project. All subsequent activities are planned, organized, and
controlled from the perspective of that vision. Mapping becomes easier because everyone knows
what perspective to take.
3.It bridges the communications gap. Since a vision statement describes what the project is to achieve,
theres less chance for ambiguity as people understand the importance of their activities.
4.The vision statement provides a basis for evaluating performance. Throughout the project cycle,
questions will arise about performance. The vision statement is the yardstick against which
performance can be judged.
5.It determines the importance of questions that arise during the project. What is important and what is
not must always be clear. A vision statement is the tool to help answer those questions.
6.The vision statement empowers, it gives people a means for independent judgment. Essentially it is
the criterion for decision making.
Communicating the Vision
A vision statement is worthless, of course, unless other people know about it. Therefore, Perry widely
distributes the statement. He ensures that the right people receive the statement at the right time.
Making the vision statement public has obvious benefits, which are important to state here. For example, it
gives people a sense of the scope of the project. It establishes the groundwork for effective communication via
a common language and mental framework. Finally, it helps build a sense of community.
Exhibit 4-1. Vision statement.
Smythe Project Vision Statement
Provide a wedding with the grandest of flair, which all attendees will talk about for years to come and which
will bring joy and happiness to the families of the newlyweds.
But the challenges of communication are many. Mental paradigms, values, beliefs, and attitudes, for example,
may restrict how the vision statement is received. People tend to filter or slant the message. Also, pockets of
resistance exist, reflecting nonacceptance of the vision. That resistance might be covert (subtle, negative
comments) or overt (vocalizing opposition). Another challenge is to cut through the layers of bureaucracy.
Organizational layers may filter or alter the message, either intentionally or inadvertently.
So Perry will publish the vision statement in a house newsletter. He will post it on the projects Web site. He
will conduct information-sharing sessions or give presentations. Hell provide a copy for each project manual
and reiterate it at training sessions and other meetings. (Chapters 13, 14, and 19 have additional information
on communciation.) The key is to ensure the vision statement is brought to everyones attention.
Keeping People Pocused on the Vision
Perry realizes that it is easy to get sidetrackedthat is, to lose sight of the vision while fighting fires. He is
concerned about not letting those fires distract him or the team. If they become distracted the likelihood
increases for the schedule to slide, the project to overrun the budget, and the output to be inferior.
As project manager, Perry takes the lead in asking whether each process, activity, or action will achieve the
vision. He continually raises the issue of direction, although he wants everyone to do the same. And there are
several ways he can ensure that people stay focused, such as collecting and evaluating data regarding schedule
and budget; tracking past performance and projecting the future; identifying likely risks and ways to respond;
instituting change management disciplines; and collecting and evaluating measurements and metrics on
quality. Chapters 15 and 16 will describe methods for data collection. Of course, Perry does not do this alone.
He obtains help from team players to validate his assessments.
Facilitating and Expediting Performance
Most project teams do not operate in a vacuum. They face obstacles and frustrations, such as not having the
right equipment or having to deal with bureaucratic politics. In addition, project managers can frustrate or
facilitate the performance of team members.
Perry, of course, wants to facilitate rather than impede performance. He faces constraints on his power, yet he
refuses to take a dying cockroach position. He strives to eliminate physical distractions (e.g., noisy
equipment), to ensure the availability of the right tools (e.g., telecommunication equipment and software), to
shield the team from administrative red tape (e.g., computing paperwork), and to handle the political aspects
of the project (e.g., interference in daily activities by senior management).
Perry does not address every problem or obstacle that confronts the team. But he determines what is
important, in light of whether it affects the achievement of the vision.
Motivation to Participate
Perry understands that, without people, the project does not exist. He also knows that without motivated
people, performance will suffer. To motivate his team, Perry must have insight into human behavior and
direct it toward achieving the vision.
Motivation deals with the internal conditions that encourage people to act or not to act. It is a complex process
that remains intriguing to psychologists and layman alike. From Sigmund Freud and Carl Jung to
contemporary practitioners, the mystery of human behavior remains, despite growth in our knowledge. From
a managerial perspective, there are many theories that work most of the time, but not always, and have proved
useful for project managers like Perry.
Credit for the birth of motivational theory largely falls to Frederick Taylor, a major contributor to the
development of the concept of scientific management. He relied on identifying the most efficient tasks to
perform a job, training people to do them, developing standards to measure performance, and separating tasks
between management and workers. The best workersthe ones meeting or exceeding the standardreceived
the best pay.
Over the years, it has become quite clear that scientific management, albeit revolutionary, had negative
motivational consequences. Work often became meaningless and highly routine, and management relied
solely on financial motivations. But since Taylor, other motivational therories have been developed.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


One is Frederick Herzbergs two-factor theory of motivation. According to this, people are motivated via
maintenance (hygiene) or motivational factors (motivators). Maintenance factors are dissatisfiers, meaning
that if not present to a sufficient degree, they will negatively impact motivation. Maintenance factors include
pay, policies, and work conditions. Motivational factors are satisfiers, meaning that if addressed, they will
positively impact performance. Motivational factors include opportunities for achievement, recognition, and
advancement.
Abraham Maslows hierarchy of needs is another popular motivational theory. According to this, people are
motivated by five fundamental needs, in the following order: physiological, safety, love/belongingness,
self-esteem, and self-actualization. Each need must be satisfied sequentially.
Physiological needs are ones like food, sex, and water. Safety needs include psychological and physical
security. Love/belongingness needs include social acceptability. Self-esteem needs include feeling good and
confident about oneself. Self-actualization needs include realizing ones fun potential.
Other motivational theories are more narrowly focused. According to David C. McClellands n Ach theory,
people have a need to achieve; the degree just varies from person to person. He found that this need was
influenced by the expectation of success and the likelihood of reward. If a manager combines the two, theres
a greater the probability of achieving successful results. Victor Vroom developed another theory of
motivation based on an individuals goal and the influence different behaviors have in achieving that goal. If
people feel a goal is important, they will select the appropriate behavior that promises the highest probability
of success. Hence, motivation depends on whether people place much value on a goal.
Motivational theories have laid the foundation for managerial theories. One of those is Douglas McGregors
Theory X and Theory Y. The Theory X style of management involves taking a negative view of human nature.
Managers believe people dislike work, will avoid it, accept little or no responsibility, and consequently need
close oversight, maybe even coercion. But Theory Y takes a positive view of human nature. Managers believe
people like work and, if the rewards and conditions are right, will commit themselves to their jobs and take on
responsibilityconsequently, close oversight is unnecessary.
Research known as the Michigan studies has revealed two types of supervisory styles that can affect
motivation: production and employee-centered. Production-centered supervisors are task-oriented. They treat
people as instruments of production and intervene on how to perform the work; they tend to be autocratic in
their style. Employee-centered supervisors are people-oriented. They grant autonomy to people when
Title
-----------
performing tasks, take a positive view of the capabilities and talents of subordinates, and tend to be
democratic in their style. The studies found that employee-centered supervisors generally achieve the best
performance.
Perry recognizes that the trend in managing people is increasingly to emphasize the people side. A dramatic
shift has occurred away from being task or mission oriented and toward taking a behaviorist approach. Project
managers, especially, must be sensitive to this shift because they often lack command and control. They must
rely on positive motivation to have people perform tasks and must understand how their own behavior affects
that of others.
Keeping the above theories in mind, Perry uses some powerful motivational tools:
Delegation
Because some project managers feel powerless (e.g., they lack command and control over people), they
equate that with a loss of control and to compensate, do many tasks themselves. The results are frequently
poor because they assume too much work. The work piles up and the schedule slides. The answer, as Perry
knows, is to delegate.
Delegating is having one person act on behalf of another. This means relinquishing authority to perform the
work but not necessarily the responsibility or accountability for the results. A reluctance to delegate often
indicates lack of confidence in oneself or the delegate. It manifests itself through comments like I can do a
better job myself.
Perry is a practical person who knows that delegation can have negative consequences, too. To ensure that he
delegates work correctly, he looks at the nature and importance of the tasks, the capabilities and personality of
the individuals, and the availability of time and other resources.
Job rotation, Enlargement, and Enrichment
Job rotation entails moving people from one job to another to increase their overall awareness or exposure. It
is useful for inculcating a generalist background and providing a bit picture viewpoint. Job enlargement
involves increasing the number of tasks and responsibilities to perform. It increases the level of effort and
challenge. Job enrichment entails structuring or assessing tasks and responsibilities to give people the
opportunity to actualize.
Applying all three tools requires careful consideration. Perry must ponder the personality, talents, expertise,
and knowledge of each individual. He must also consider nonbehavioral factors such as the availability of
time, importance of the task, learning curve, cost, and impact to quality.
Participation
Commitment is important to a projects success. If lacking, then people will not care about the results. Perry
knows a powerful way to build commitment is through participation.
Participation means obtaining input or feedback prior to making a decision. Perry accomplishes that by
getting feedback on the statement of work, estimates, and schedules, and getting participation at meetings.
Participation breeds emotional commitment to the outcome.
Personal Goal Attainment
People have different goalsmoney, power, or physical surroundingsbut Perry must identify the reason
each person is working on the Smythe Project. This knowledge will help him satisfy a persons expectations
while simultaneously achieving the overall goals of the project.
What Perry hopes to achieve is to maximize output by matching effort, performance, and project goals. To do
that, Perry must know the people on the project, by holding one-on-one sessions, reviewing of personnel
documentation (rsums), and personal familiarization. Only then can he motivate by satisfying the WIIFM
(Whats In It For Me) syndrome.
Personality/Task Match
Personality is the composite of characteristics that constitute a persons behavior. How people interact with
their environment reflects their personality. One type of interaction is through the performance of tasks. Perry
knows that some people are a mismatch for certain tasks. Some may not be gregarious enough to perform
tasks involving social interaction; others lack the personality to deal with routine, repetitive tasks that involve
methodical detail.
A mismatch between personality and task can negatively impact project performance. Tasks can go
uncompleted, morale and esprit de corps can plummet, quality can suffer, and schedule can slide. To avoid
such results, Perry considers several variables when matching a person to a task. From a personality
perspective, he looks at the track record, including what they did and did not do well in the past; their
characteristics (introversion, extroversion); intelligence; self-confidence; stress handling abilities; and needs.
From a structural perspective, he also considers the complexity of the task, as well as its variety, autonomy,
and scope.
Recognition
Many people want to stand out. Receiving recognition is one way to satisfy that need.
Recognition must be done carefully; otherwise, it can be counterproductive. The idea is to find a balance
between individual and team recognition and to discover the types of recognition people value. Perry also
knows that recognition must follow some basic principles. It must be genuine, timely, fair, objective,
meaningful, and not overdone.
Stretching
Sometimes Perry will assign people to tasks that present a challenge. People view the task as more difficult
than the typical task, but not impossible to complete. The new challenge may exceed physical and
emotional dimensions, or present a mental challenge relating to intelligence, training, or aptitude. The idea is
to match the person to the task so that the person stretches and does not break.
One key motivational issue in recent years is the role stress plays on the project manager and the team. Perry
knows that he and his team will be under considerable stress and that he has responsibility for managing it.
There are two types of stress: negative stress (or distress) and positive stress (or eustress).
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Negative stress manifests itself in many ways. It causes ailments, from hives to heart attacks. It affects people
psychologically by making them depressed and argumentative or just wanting to give up. It affects the
performance of the team as conflict intensifies; people start throwing their work over the fence and they
lower their productivity.
Perry is well aware that there are many causes for high stress. Downsizing, increased time-to-market
pressures, rapidly varying market conditions, consultants and contractors hired as replacements, and
outsourcing services all add to a stressful situation. Poor project management practices also cause stress. Such
practices include not defining roles and responsibilities clearly; unrealistically assigning resources;
compressing the schedules; providing inadequate tools; and not isolating the team from politics.
Perry realizes that he does not have to let stress have a harmful effect on him or his team. He can alleviate the
impact in several ways. For example, he can develop and revise his project plan to reflect realism, rotate
people between critical and noncritical tasks or equitably distribute the workload; provide opportunities for
the team members to go on respites or breaks from time to time; assign people to tasks that are more suitable
to their expertise level, intelligence type, or personality type; and encourage people to be flexible. As for
Perry himself, he considers all the same for himself.
Team Building
A team is more than just a group of people doing work. It is an assembly of individuals with diverse
backgrounds who interact for a specific purpose. The idea is to capture and direct the synergy generated by
the group to efficiently and effectively achieve a goal. Throughout the years, Perry has witnessed many signs
of ineffective teams.
Title
-----------
What Is Your Team-Building Style?
Decide-X, a Bellevue, Washington, company, provides a scientific toolalso called Decide-Xto measure
how much information a person needs before reaching a decision.
According to Decide-X, people deal with team-building situations in ways that reflect their needs and
desires, as well as their preferences in dealing with direction, change, details, and other characteristics of a
work situation. There are four primary styles:
Reactive Stimulators thrive on action and the immediate. They prefer situations or projects that are
fast-moving and have lots of pressure.
Logical Processors thrive on logical detail while maintaining focus. They prefer situations and
projects with organizational structure.
Hypothetical Analyzers like to solve problems using decomposition to unravel complexity. They
prefer situations and projects that provide a relatively slow pace to perform analysis.
Relational Innovators deal in ideas from a big-picture perspective and find relationships or patterns.
They prefer situations and projects that involve blue-skying and move at a pace that allows them to do
that.
From a project management perspective, the Decide-X tool is very useful. Different combinations of styles
on a project team can influence the level of detail that goes into making a decision and how quickly it is
done. For example, if you put a Reactive Stimulator and a Relational Innovator on a task, the questions will
arise: (1) will decisions be made quickly with little attention to detail (as may be needed), or will they be
made much more slowly, to allow for exploration of detail? And (2) will the Reactive Stimulator and
Relational Innovator cooperate, or will they conflict?
Decide-X differs from other approaches, which focus only on the individual, because it looks at the
interactions of people. Decide-X is described in more detail in Gary Salton, Organizational Engineering
(Ann Arbor, Mich.: Professional Communications, 1996).
Characteristics of Poor Teams
No processes for gaining consensus or resolving conflicts. Team squabbles and overt and covert
discussions are ongoing occurrences, making cooperation difficult, even impossible.
Team members who lack commitment to the goal. No one has an emotional attachment to the goal.
No camaraderie or esprit de corps. The players do not feel that they are part of a team. Instead,
everyone acts in his or her own interests.
Lack of openness and trust. Everyone is guarded, protective of his or her own interests. Openness and
truthfulness are perceived as yielding to someone, giving a competitive advantage, or exposing
vulnerabilities.
Vague role definitions. The reporting structures and responsibilities are unclear, causing conflicts.
Territorial disputes and power struggles occur often.
No commonality or cohesiveness. The team is an unorganized grouping of people. No one feels a
sense of community or brotherhood. No common ground exists other than to meet periodically to work.
This results in lost synergy.
Conformity and mind protection. Insecurity permeates people for fear of being different or
ostracized. People do not speak or share information unless it reinforces behavior or thoughts.
Low tolerance for diversity. The pressure to conform is so intense that anyone different in thinking or
work style is ostracized or not taken seriously. Whistle-blowers and creative types, for instance, may be
viewed with suspicion. Under such circumstances no opportunity is available to capitalize on peoples
strengths and address their weaknesses.
Insufficient resources. Whether its people, equipment, supplies, facilities, time, or money,
insufficient resources make teams ineffective. The situation can also lead to squabbling, dissention,
even revolts. If resources are not distributed in an objective, meaningful manner, then differences can
magnify into severe conflicts. Members of the team can quickly become polarized.
Lack of management support. If team members perceivewhether justifiably or notthat
management is not supportive of the project, then motivation can plummet. People will feel that the
work is not valuable, at least to the organization.
Listless team members. The goals are vague or nonexistent. Even if the goals are defined, no
oneincluding the project managerseems to focus on them. Instead, everyone is aimless.
Discontinuity between individual expectations and group expectations. There is a misalignment
between the two, with the latter not valuing the former. A symbiotic relationship between the two just
does not exist.
An ineffective team is conflict ridden, filled with distrust, unfocused, and reeking of negative competition.
These conditions manifest themselves in high turnover and absenteeism, considerable frustration levels, poor
communication, no esprit de corps, and intolerance.
Perry wants, of course, a project team with desirable characteristics:
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Characteristics of Effective Teams
Acceptance of new ideas and objective evaluation of them
Sustained common norms, values, and beliefs without excessive conformity
Synergy through mutual support
Loyalty and commitment to the project
Focus on end results
A trusting, open attitude
Ability to gain consensus and resolve conflicts
High morale and esprit de corps
Information and resources sharing
Perry knows all too well that a team with these characteristics is difficult to achieve. Yet he also knows that
such characteristics will not arise unless he takes action. There are seven actions that he takes to engender
such characteristics:
1.He sets the example. He not only espouses certain values and beliefs but also exercises them. He
wants people to be trustful and open, so he is trustful and open. He expects people to be committed, so
he is committed. In other words, he walks the talk.
2.He encourages communicationoral, written, and electronic. He knows that communication is more
than writing memos, standing in front of a team, or setting up a Web site. It requires sharing
information in an open and trusting manner, holding frequent meetings (status reviews and staff),
publishing a project manual, defining acronyms and jargon, employing technology as a
communications tool, and encouraging task interdependence.
3.He has the team focus on results. They direct all their energies toward achieving the vision. Whether
he or the team makes a decision, it is made in the context of achieving the vision. Perry constantly
communicates the vision and establishes change control and problem-solving processes.
4.He engenders high morale and esprit de corps by developing and maintaining the energy that comes
from teaming. He knows, however, that he must continually nurture that energy to keep it flowing. So
he empowers team members, encourages consensus building and win-win solutions, increases task
interdependence, matches the right person with the right task, and teams people with complementary
Title
-----------
work styles.
5.He builds commitment to the vision and the project. Throughout the project cycle, team commitment
can rise or fall. Ideally, Perry wants to achieve the former. Ways to do that include matching peoples
interests with tasks, encouraging participative decision making, empowering people, seeking input and
feedback, assigning people with responsibility for completing deliverables, and keeping the project in
the forefront of everyones mind.
6.He lays the groundwork for synergy. A team is more than the sum of its members. But synergy
requires cooperation. Ways to obtain cooperation include providing cross-training so that people
understand each others roles and responsibilities, clearly defining roles and responsibilities,
determining each team members strengths and weaknesses and making assignments that capitalize on
the former, and having groups within the team be accountable for a complete work unit (e.g.,
subproduct or deliverable).
7.He encourages greater diversity in thinking, work style, and behavior. Always mindful of the danger
of groupthink, Perry encourages different thoughts and perspectives. He is especially aware of the
multicultural environment of the Smythe Project. The project culminates in Italy and, therefore,
requires working with people from another country. The Smythe family also has many friends around
the world who will attend the wedding. To ensure receptivity to diversity, Perry uses cross-training and
job rotation to broaden peoples understanding of each other, encourages experimentation and
brainstorming to develop new ideas and keep an open mind, seeks task interdependence to encourage
communication, and nurtures a continuous learning environment.
Team Diversity
With globalization of the economy in general and the Smythe Project in particular, Perry recognizes that the
challenge of leading a diversified team has never been greater. The team members have a variety of
backgrounds, including race, ethnicity, and religion. Leading a team in such an environment requires
heightened sensitivity to different values, beliefs, norms, and lifestyles.
Perry understands that people vary in their concept of time, ways of doing business, styles of management and
leadership, and views of how the world functions. He also understands that differences exist in the meaning of
words (semantics), interpretation of expressions (body language), perception of priorities, and definition of
team building. Needless to say, all this diversity adds complexity to the planning, coordination, and control of
the project. He knows, however, that he can deal with diversity in several ways.
1.He sets the example by embracing diversity. Through research, background reviews, interviews, and
the like, Perry learns about the diverse backgrounds of the people and encourages everyone to do the
same.
2.He is patient when dealing with people of a different background. He remains conscious of different
values and beliefs, for example, and accounts for them when leading the project.
3.He overcomes the temptation to stereotype. That is, he avoids generalizing about people based on
one characteristic. He also tackles stereotyping by team members. An effective approach is to have
people with different backgrounds work together. He can also have the team, with himself, attend
diversity training to understand and respect differences.
4.He has empathy for other peoples experiences. The word is empathy, not sympathy, since the latter
connotes patronization and condescension. He attempts to appreciate, for example, the difficulties in
reconciling different perceptions of time.
5.He encourages feedback. He is especially mindful to obtain feedback from people whose cultural
background is dramatically different from his own or from the rest of the team. This lessens the
tendency for the team to split into subgroups.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Contract Employees and Consultants
Along with downsizing has come a corresponding rise in the use of consultants and contract employees. The
Smythe Project is no different, and its use of such people challenges his efforts to build a cohesive team.
Many contract employees and consultants do not feel they are part of a team. They know that their presence is
temporary; their participation could end at any time; hence their commitment is questionable. At the same
time, many permanent employees feel slighted by the presence of independent contractors and consultants.
They feel that management is exhibiting lack of confidence in their work, or that management perceives
outside help as better than inside. Team members may also feel that the contractors or consultants are
receiving higher compensation or the best offices or equipment.
These circumstances, real or imagined, challenge any team-building effort. But they are not insurmountable,
even for Perry. He gives preference to permanent employees regarding task assignments, equipment, and
other perks. An exception is made only if the consultant or contractor has unique expertise, and, if so,
preference is only for the duration of the task. Perry also gives employees the first opportunity to participate
in decision making. (More about contractors and outsourcing in Chapter 9.)
Telecommuting and Mobile Computing
In todays environment, team members may be spread over a wide geographical area, presenting little
opportunity to see each other. (See Chapter 19 for additional information.) Team building can be extremely
difficult, thanks to this dispersion. To foster team building, however, Perry takes three important steps:
1.He tries to have everyone on the team meet periodically. At a minimum, this meeting provides an
opportunity to exchange ideas, share information, and become acquainted.
2.He develops rules of exchange or communications etiquette. For instance, colleagues should respond
to each other within a certain time. Such etiquette enables greater interaction, which in turn increases
bonding or cohesion.
3.He assigns people to tasks that require greater interaction and, if only occasionally, meeting
physically. If meeting is costly or impossible, the task should require at least some electronic
interdependence to generate cohesion.
In general, Perry treats the word TEAMING as an acronym to remind him of how to build a good project
Title
-----------
team:
Target Focus on the end result.
Energize Provide the emotional spark that encourages high morale and esprit de corps.
Assemble Bring people together with defined roles and responsibilities.
Move Get people to move efficiently and effectively toward the results.
Inform Have people share knowledge, skills, and expertise, laterally and vertically.
Neutralize Remove biases and preferences in decision making.
Glue Keep the team as a cohesive unit so that synergy is produced.
There is additional information on telecommuting and other technology-based innovations in Chapter 19.
The Project Manager as a Motivator
Leadership plays an important role in the successful execution of a project. However, it is not something that
can be done in a paint-by-number fashion. Perry, like all experienced project managers, knows that
leadership must be constantly exercised throughout a project. It requires having a basic understanding of what
motivates people.
A vision statement partly satisfies the motivational needs of a project team. Perry realizes, however, that the
vision is just one aspect of leadership. He must build teams and focus all their efforts on achieving the vision.
The vision plays another role too. It provides the basis for developing a meaningful statement of work.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Can you identify the obstacles for exercising effective leadership inherent in your project?
2.How will you develop a vision for your project? How do you plan to communicate it? What are the
challenges you face in developing and communicating that vision? How do you plan to overcome
them?
3.How will you ensure that your project stays focused on the vision? What challenges will you face?
4.How will you facilitate and expedite performance? What obstacles will you face and how will you
overcome them?
5.In what ways (e.g., job enrichment) do you plan to motivate the people on your team? What
challenges will you face and how do you plan to overcome them?
6.In what ways (e.g., focus on the vision) will you encourage team building? What obstacles will you
face and how will you overcome them?
7.If you have contractors, consultants, or telecommuters, how will they be involved? What impact will
that have on the permanent team members and what will you do about any problems that arise?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 5
The Statement of Work and the Project
Announcement
Perry recognizes that a key determinant for success or failure of a project is the adequacy of the definition. As
described in Chapter 1, the project manager defines the project, or determines its vision (as mentioned in
Chapter 4), goals, objectives, scope, responsibilities, and deliverables. He knows that good definition lays the
groundwork for developing reliable plans. It also sets the stage for effective communication throughout the
project cycle.
To define is to determine exactly the purpose and boundaries of the project. In other words,
What are the goals and objectives?
Who are the principal participants?
When must the project be finished?
Where will the project be executed?
How will the result be achieved?
Why is the project being launched?
What are the constraints/limitations of the project?
By answering such questions Perry can better execute the other functions of project management. However,
getting answers to these and other questions is not easy. It requires considerable effort, largely by
interviewing members of the steering committee, contacting the customer, and reviewing documentation (e.g.,
the contract between the company and the Smythe family).
The Statement of Work
Although a contract has been signed between GWI and the Smythe family, many details remain unaccounted
for. Perry uses a statement of work (SOW) or, more informally, a statement of understanding to obtain and
record answers to any remaining questions.
Title
-----------
The SOW is a definitive agreement between the customer and the projects leadership about what is to be
accomplished. Perry knows, however, that the SOW is more than an agreement between the major
participants. It also sets the groundwork for effective communication, raises and addresses assumptions and
potential conflicts, and gives direction overall.
The SOW, then, is a medium for defining what the project will accomplish and the overall approach to take.
With an SOW Perry will have the answers to five Ws:
1.What is the product or service to be delivered?
2.Who are the primary participants, including the customers?
3.When must the project start and be completed?
4.Where will the project be undertaken?
5.Why is there a project?
More specifically, Perry will capture the following information:
Constraints or limitations on the work
Coordination requirements
Levels of support from participants
Major assumptions
Major responsibilities
Milestone dates
Quality criteria
Specific objectives
The onus is on Perry to acquire the data necessary to draft the SOW. It is also on him to draft the document
and obtain final approval. To obtain that data, Perry has several options, which include examining data from
earlier, similar projects; interviewing project sponsor, steering committee, vendors, or customers; reviewing
existing documentation, such as memos or procedures with earlier customers; and reviewing lessons learned,
if applicable, from earlier projects.
After collecting the data, Perry prepares a draft of the SOW, which follows this outline form:
I. Introduction
II. Scope
III. Assumptions
IV. Constraints
V. Performance Criteria
VI. Product/Service description
The Art of Interviewing
You dont have to be a Barbara Walters or Larry King to conduct effective interviews. You just need to
follow a few principles:
Determine the objectives of the interview. Is it specific information that you need or general
background information?
Determine whether you want to do a structured or an unstructured interview.
Structured interviewing is asking a set of questions that help you get specific, often detailed information.
You use it when the subject matter is clear and unambiguous. For example, use a structured interview to
obtain specific information about a line item in a statement of work.
Unstructured interviewing is asking open-ended questions and winging it. The interviewer controls the
interview as it progresses. You use it when the subject matter is vague and greater insight into the subject
matter is necessary. For example, use an unstructured interview to obtain an understanding of the
customers expectations for a project.
Follow proper interviewing etiquette by asking permission to record or tape sessions, asking clear and
concise questions, keeping emotional distance from the response, listening actively, and scheduling
interview sessions at the right time. Avoid engaging in a debate and do not introduce bias in your questions.
If you follow these guidelines, interviewing will be a useful tool for acquiring information for your
statement of work.
VII. Major Responsibilities
VIII. References
IX. Amendments
X. Signatures
Exhibit 5-1 shows the draft SOW that Perry has prepared. When reviewing the draft, consider the purpose of
each major section.
Introduction
This section describes the goal of the project. It provides the name of the project, gives reasons for its
existence, names major players, and provides other pertinent information.
The Art of Negotiation
As a project manager, you will have plenty of opportunity to negotiate. You will have to negotiate
resources, schedules, budgets, and quality with customers, team members, and senior management.
Sometimes the negotiation will be formal, other times it will be informal.
When negotiating, keep these principles in mind:
1.Seek a win-win solution. Negotiation is not a victory over someone. Such victories are short-lived
and can cause greater problems later on.
2.Keep the commonalities between you and the person youre negotiating with in the forefront of
your mind. Commonalities might include values, norms, tools, goals, or visions. By stressing whats
common, you keep communication open.
3.Be flexible. A rigid stance may leave you with nothing or even a lose-lose result. Be flexible by
knowing what you value most and least.
4.Pick the right time and place to negotiate, one that is comfortable for both parties. Being
comfortable opens the dialogue.
5.Know as much as possible about the person youre negotiating with.
Scope
This section lists the projects boundariesthat is, what is and is not to be done. The scope is important for
planning and also for minimizing changes.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Assumptions
This section lists any unsubstantiated ideas about the project. Assumptions may, for example, relate to levels
of internal support or existing or market conditions. Assumptions are used in planning.
Constraints
Rarely does a project have unlimited resources at its disposal. Money, time, people, equipment, supplies, and
facilities are often limited in quantity and quality. Recognizing such limitations early on enables realistic
planning.
Exhibit 5-1. Statement of work (SOW).
I.Introduction
This project resulted from a request by the Smythe family of 1801 Brotherhood Avenue, Rockford,
Pennsylvania. Although our primary focus is on weddings within the continental United States, this
wedding will occur in Naples, Italy. This is GWIs first project outside the United States. It is
expected that this project will lead to similar ones in the future, substantially increasing our revenues.
II.Scope
This project will require all our services provided for domestic weddings. These services include:
Announcements, including to friends, relatives, and newspapers
Ceremony and reception locations
Decorations and props
Entertainment
Flowers
Food and beverages
Hotel accommodations
Invitations
Lighting
Music
Title
-----------
Photography
Prewedding parties and rehearsals, including bachelor parties and bridal showers
Sound
Travel
Videotaping
Wedding attire
Wedding feast and cake
Wedding transportation
Services required by the Smythes but not available through GWI will be contracted out.
III.Assumptions
The Smythe Project will be managed based on the following assumptions:
Internal resources will be available to include electronic and staffing.
Contracted services will perform when required.
The project will have priority over existing projects.
No legal problems will occur in holding a wedding outside the United States.
IV.Constraints
The following constraints will be placed on the project:
Culture differences may impede performance.
Resources must continue to support other wedding projects.
V.Performance Criteria
The project will comply with all requirements listed in the contract between the Smythe family and
GWI. Any deviations from the contract must be reviewed by the steering committee and require
signatures.
The project must finish on 11 June 2000. The cost for the wedding cannot exceed $1 million (U.S.).
VI.Product/Service Description
GWI will provide a full one-day wedding service on top of Mount Vesuvius on 11 June 2000. The
wedding includes providing lodging for dignitaries, food, tourist attraction events, and entertainment.
GWI will also arrange the wedding ceremony, feast, and itinerary for the honeymoon. Refer to the
contract between the Smythe family and GWI. Also refer to Section II, Scope, for additional
information.
VII.Major Responsibilities
The project manager will:
Serve as the primary point of contact for the project.
Develop and execute a comprehensive project plan.
Keep the steering committee informed regarding progress.
Use all resources efficiently and effectively.
Evaluate changes to all baselines.
The steering committee will provide continuous overseeing for the project, which includes:
Periodic review of progress
Guidance and direction, when necessary
Reporting to the internal customer
VIII.References
The primary documents supporting this statement of work are:
Contract between GWI and the Smythe family
Existing company policies and procedures
IX.Amendments
This document may be changed only after review and approval of first the steering committee and
then the internal customer.
X.Signatures
Project manager
Steering committee members
Internal customer
Performance Criteria
This section describes the criteria for customer satisfaction. Often, it points to three criteria: cost, schedule,
and quality. The project cannot, for example, cost more than a set amount; specific milestones or red-letter
dates must be met; service or product specifications must be addressed. This information allows for
meaningful planning and ensures that the project will address key concerns.
Product/Service Description
This section has an overall description of the product or service. This description might include the basic
features, characteristics, components, or deliverables to be produced. The content may be a narrative or a
diagram. This information is useful for developing a work breakdown structure.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Major Responsibilities
This section delineates the high-level tasks of major participants. These tasks will be given in finer detail in
the work breakdown structure.
References
This section lists any documentation that governs the content of the SOW. The documents often provide more
details for planning.
Amendments
The SOW is not something etched in stone, contrary to popular belief. It is a living document that probably
will be modified from time to time. This section is for appending any agreed-upon changes that come later.
Signatures
This section contains the approvals of all principal decision makers. At minimum, it should have signatures of
the project manager, executive sponsor, customer, and executive steering committee members. If the ultimate
customer is external to the company, as with the Smythe Project, the customer is frequently the liaison with
the external customer. If this is the case, the statement of work usually becomes part of the terms and
conditions of the formal contract.
Exhibit 5-2 shows a flowchart for developing a statement of work.
The Project Announcement
With a completed SOW, Perry has one more task before he can start to plan: publishing a project
announcement.
The project announcement is a widely distributed memoalbeit more than just another memo. It is also a
way to give visibility to the project, communicate to everyone the priority of the project, and acquire the
political muscle to compete with other projects.
Title
-----------
Exhibit 5-2.Flowchart for statement of work.
Exhibit 5-3. Project announcement.
Date: 15 January 2000
To: Jones, N., et al.
cc: Rogersby, H., et al.
Subject: Smythe Project
Perry Fitzberg has been designated the project manager for the Smythe Project. He will report directly to the
executive steering committee, consisting of all functional vice-presidents of GWI.
The project must start no later than 30 January and be completed by 11 June 2000. The wedding will occur
in Naples, Italy. Approximately 1,000 people will attend the event.
Amelia
Amelia Rainbow
President, GWI
Extension 3400
Mailstop 01-01
The key question is, Who will prepare and sign the memo? Being a self-starter, Perry prepares the memo
himself and presents it to Amelia for signature. He believes she is the internal customer and sponsor for the
project. In many circumstances, however, there is a distinction between the two. Exhibit 5-3 shows the
announcement.
With publication of the project announcement, Perry can begin planning. The planning function, as described
in Chapter 1, entails many tasks, which are covered in Chapters 6 through 8.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Provide answers to these questions about your project:
What are the goals and objectives of the project?
Who are the principal participants?
When must the project be started and finished?
Where will the project be executed?
Why is the project being launched?
How will the product or service be?
2.If you dont have the answers to any of the above, how are you going to get them?
By interview?
Document research?
Contact with the customer?
3.Is a statement of work, or understanding, necessary? If so, do you know what is contained in each of
these sections:
Introduction?
Assumptions?
Constraints?
Performance criteria?
Product/service description?
Major responsibilities?
References?
Amendments?
Signatures?
4.Do you need a project announcement? If so, do you know:
Who will prepare it?
Who will sign it?
What the contents should be?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 6
The Work Breakdown Structure
Perry now has the visibility he needs and the details for building the project. Now he will use the SOW to
develop a work breakdown structure, or WBS. The WBS is a detailed listing of the deliverables and tasks for
building the product or delivering the service. It is a top-down, broad-to-specific hierarchical outcome of the
work to perform.
There are several benefits to developing a WBS.
1.The WBS forces the project manager, team members, and customers to delineate the steps required
to build and deliver the product or service. The exercise alone encourages a dialogue that will help
clarify ambiguities, bring out assumptions, narrow the scope of the project, and raise critical issues
early on.
2.It lays the groundwork for developing an effective schedule and good budget plans. A well-defined
WBS enables resources to be allocated to specific tasks, helps in generating a meaningful schedule, and
makes calculating a reliable budget easier.
3.The level of detail in a WBS makes it easier to hold people accountable for completing their tasks.
With a defined WBS, people cannot hide under the cover of broadness. A well-defined task can be
assigned to a specific individual, who is then responsible for its completion.
4.The process of developing and completing a WBS breeds excitement and commitment. Although
Perry will develop the high-level WBS, he will seek the participation of his core team to flesh out the
WBS. This participation will spark involvement in the project.
Of course, developing a WBS is not easy. For one, it takes timeand plenty of it. A large WBS (one that
identifies several thousand activities) can take several weeks to develop. For another, it requires effort. There
is a knowledge transfer and exercise of brain power. The larger the scope of the project, the larger the WBS
will be. More people must provide input and then approve the portion they are responsible to perform.
Finally, the WBS requires continual refinement. The first iteration is rarely right and as the project changes,
so does the WBS. Still, the advantages outweigh the challenges. A good WBS makes planning and executing
a project easier.
Title
-----------
Where WBSs Go Wrong
More often than not, a simple WBS can improve the overall performance of a project. Sometimes, however,
a WBS can do more harm than good. The reasons some WBSs fail are as follows:
1.The WBS does not have sufficient detail. If it is kept to too high a level, estimating, and tracking
the schedule and cost performance become guesstimation. Composite or roll-up views lack
meaning because the lower-level content is missing or too general to be reliable.
2.The WBS is the result of one individual and does not include those who will work on the tasks.
When the WBS is published, few team members have a sense of ownership or commitment to the
contents.
3.The WBS does not cover the whole project. It contains only the activities needed to build the
project. It might omit other important activities, such as project administration and training. The result
is that subsequent delivery of the product or service is unsatisfactory.
4.The entire WBS is not used in subsequent planning. The project manager takes an eclectic view of
the WBS, using only selected portions. The result is incomplete planning, lacking a comprehensive
view of the work to be done.
5.There is a failure to put the WBS under configuration management. Once everyone agrees on its
contents, the WBS should not become frozen or baselined, with all future changes not identified
or evaluated for their impact on the project. Failure to manage changes to the WBS can result in
unanticipated impacts on the scope, schedule, or cost.
As Perry progresses down each leg of the WBS, he gets to a level of detail that provides the ability to track
and monitor progress, make assignments that build accountability, and reliably estimate the hours to perform
tasks. How detailed the WBS gets depends on the level of control the project manager wants. Generally, the
more specific the WBS, the more accurate the planning and the greater the ability to monitor progress. A
common heuristic Perry uses is the 80-hour rule: each of the lowest-level items in the WBS should not exceed
80 hours effort. If the job requires more, then he breaks down the task into smaller tasks. Perry recognizes
that he will have to continually refine the WBS as he estimates the time to complete tasks.
To begin developing a WBS, Perry identifies all the requirements for the wedding. First he reviews the SOW,
which provides a guideline since it is representative of a high level and contains all the necessary information.
Other sources of information for building the WBS are documentation, including the WBS, of related
projects; interview notes; legal documentation; and memorandums.
With this information, Perry decides on how to approach the WBS. There are many ways to draw up a
WBSfor example, by responsibility (see Exhibit 6-1); by phase; or by deliverables. He decides on
deliverables for this WBS since that worked best for him in the past. It is also easier to determine progress at a
higher level when reporting to senior management or the customer.
Exhibit 6-1.Work breakdown structure based on responsibility.
The WBS generally consists of two components. The first component is the product breakdown structure
(PBS), which delineates the segments that constitute the final product or service. It may also contain items
deemed important (e.g., training). Each item in the PBS is described with a noun and a unique number.
The other component is the task breakdown structure (TBS), which contains the tasks to build or deliver
something (see Exhibit 6-2). It may also list tasks deemed important to the project. Each task in the TBS is
described with an action verb, a noun, and a unique number.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


The lowest level in the WBS is the work package level. These are the tasks or subtasks he will use to assign
responsibilities, construct schedules, and track progress. Consider the WBS as a giant topical outline. Each
level lower is a breakdown of a higher level. The items in the lower level constitute the one in the next higher
level. Sometimes the higher levels of a WBS are managerial levels; the details are rolled up to the
managerial level for reporting purposes. Lower levels are called technical levels.
Exhibit 6-2.Task breakdown structure (TBS).
On very large projects, each task in the work package has an accompanying description, contained in a WBS
dictionary. Each entry in the dictionary describes the expected output of the task. Thus, a WBS dictionary can
help the project manager determine whether a task has been completed.
Perrys WBS for the Smythe wedding is shown in the Appendix. He used a word processing program to
produce it. But he can also display the WBS graphically, as a tree diagram, by using graphics software.
Another way is to post sticky notes on a wall to display the hierarchical relationship. Either way, the display
will look like Exhibit 6-3.
With his draft of the WBS ready, Perry is now able to solicit input from the key players. He presents it to the
steering committee and obtains their acceptance. Next, he identifies the key skills needed to perform the tasks
and obtains additional input from team members. The PBS gives him an idea of the following needed
expertise:
Attendants
Cosmetologist
Drivers
Florist
Hair stylist
Title
-----------
Exhibit 6-3.Graphic display of task breakdown structure.
Jewelers
Lawyer
Musicians
Photographer
Planners
Public relations expert
Receptionists
Tailor
Travel agents
Ushers
Valet
Videographer
Waiters
Wedding consultants
At the moment, Perry has no idea how many people with the requisite expertise are necessary. But he will
require at least one of each on the core team (the key participants).
To acquire core team members, Perry needs once again to present his case to the steering committee, and
upon receiving its approval, to contact the relevant functional organizations. Perry now has his core team, as
shown in Exhibit 6-4. Perry then solicits input from these core team members regarding the WBS and gets
ready to take on the next step in planning: estimating the time to complete each task.
The work breakdown structure, although time-consuming to prepare, is an excellent foundation for the
remaining project planning functions. Next we consider the work-time estimates; which aid in the preparation
of schedules and costs.
Questions for Getting Started
1.What are the deliverables for your project? Did you display them in the product breakdown structure
(PBS) of the WBS?
Exhibit 6-4. Core team members.
Attendant, Pat Jones Public relations expert, Eva
Brewster
Cosmetologist, Cynthia Fralusinski Receptionist, Wonda Wrangell
Driver, Terry Karla Tailor, Frank Galucci
Florist, David Rockford Travel agent, Larry Eisenberg
Jeweler, Henry Winkless Usher, Michael Cramer
Lawyer, Robin Schister Valet, Danny Smith
Musician, Vy Toon Videographer, Raymond Leazowitz
Photographer, Gina Davies Waiter, Ted Rogers
Planner, Hank Wilson Wedding consultant, Mary Ewing
2.What are the tasks for your project? Did you display them in the task breakdown structure (TBS) of
the WBS?
3.Did you receive input from all relevant parties when building the WBS?
4.Did you perform the following when building the WBS:
Explode each leg down to the lowest level of detail (e.g., using the 80-hour rule)?
Give each item a unique number?
Give each item in the PBS a name consisting of an adjective and a noun?
Give each item in the TBS a name consisting of an action verb and an object?
5.Did you put the WBS under configuration control in the event that an item is added, removed, or
modified?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 7
Techniques for Estimating Work Times
With the work breakdown structure complete, Perry can now estimate the time required to complete each task.
But remember, an estimate is just that, an estimate. The best Perry or any project manager can hope to
develop are reliable estimates ones that offer confidence in being achievable.
The Benefits and Challenges of Estimating Work Times
Estimating the work times provides several benefits for the project manager. It gives an idea of the level of
effort required to complete a project. This information then enables the project manager to produce a realistic
plan based upon that effort. Estimating also helps the project manager anticipate the budget for the project.
Allocated funds are largely based on the effort, or labor, to produce the product or deliver the service.
The estimate becomes the basis for developing a schedule. Hours are converted to flow time, which in turn is
used, with the interrelationships among tasks, to calculate start and stop dates. Lastly, doing an estimate
breeds commitment. If the people who will do the work also help make the estimates, they will feel more
committed to their tasks and keep within the allotted time.
While it offers many benefits, estimating is not easy, for two reasons. First, it takes time and effort to develop
reliable estimates. Many people take the path of least resistance and generate either an extremely pessimistic
or an overly optimistic estimate. Good estimating requires extensive calculation and research to avoid
skewing the calculated values. Second, estimating requires dealing with ambiguity. By its very nature,
estimating has both knowns and unknowns. The unknowns can generate fear or cause people to react out of
ignorance. Either way, confidence in the resulting estimate is low.
Types of Estimating Techniques
Perry and his team can use one of four techniques to estimate the time it will take to complete each task:
1.Scientific wildly assumed guess
2.Global efficiency factor
Title
-----------
3.Productivity adjustment percent
4.Program evaluation and review, or three-point estimating, technique
Scientific Wildly Assumed Guess (SWAG)
This technique is the most popular, yet the most unreliable. The SWAG is most popular because it is quick.
The estimator determines a single value for time to do the work; no long calculations are necessary. The
estimator provides one figure for each task, quickly. The SWAG is also popular because it requires very little
research. Often, one or two individuals can do the entire estimate. It is rarely based on in-depth analysis to
derive the values.
However, the SWAG is also very unreliable for two reasons. First, it is highly subjective, based on one
persons estimate of doing a task. It accounts for only a limited number of factors, relying on an hour estimate
that is based on a feel for doing the work.
Second, it understates or overinflates the time. If the estimators hold themselves in high regard, then the
estimate will be optimistic; if they lack confidence, then it will be pessimistic. As long as the same people do
the same work, then the estimates may prove reliable. What happens, though, if someone does the work who
had no input to the estimate? What happens if an obstacle arises that the new person cannot handle? Then the
estimate becomes unreliable.
For these two reasons alone, Perry decides not to use the SWAG technique. Now he is thinking about using
the global efficiency factor technique.
Global Efficiency Factor (GEF)
This technique is also easy to use and attempts to incorporate nonproductive time into the estimate. The
estimation assumes that a person is 100 percent productive. Then the estimator accounts for nonproductive
factors that are each assigned a percent relative to each other. The estimator deducts the percents from 100
percent to derive a more realistic estimate, as follows:
Task 10.4 Arrange for food and beverage
Deficiency Percent to Deduct
Unsatisfactory skill level 8
Unfamiliarity with project 10
Unfamiliarity with tools 5
Lack of well-defined requirements 2
Total Deficiency 25
Estimate to perform work 100 hours
Adjusted estimate 125 hours [100 hours + (100 hours 25%)]
The GEF is not as popular but it does have its adherents. They believe that it accounts for nonproductive time
and eliminates the tendency toward unwarranted optimism.
However, the GEF technique has its drawbacks. The percents to deduct are often subjective themselves,
thereby skewed and subjective. The percent for each deduction will also often vary among people. Perry
decides, therefore, to look at another estimating technique: the productivity adjustment percent.
Productivity Adjustment Percent (PAP)
The PAP technique attempts to do on a more global scale what the GEF does. It applies an overall
productivity factor to the estimate for all tasks. For our example, we assume people are 80 percent productive:
Task 8.2.1 Determine floral requirements
100% - 80% = 20%. We now add this 20% factor to our baseline of 100%, giving us a PAP of 120%, or 1.2.
Estimate to perform work 100 hours
Adjusted estimate 120 hours (100 hours 1.20)
The PAP has its adherents, for two reasons. First, it is based on historical figures. Work measurement studies
are frequently used to derive the overall percent. Second, it is easy to apply this calculation. There are no
percent deductions on a task-by-task basis nor any burdensome mathematical calculations.
Despite these two benefits, there are some disadvantages. The historical records are not always available to
determine the productivity factor for an organization. Also, the figure is so global that it may not be relevant
to a specific task. Finally, it does not account for the complexity of issues involving individual tasks. For
these three reasons, Perry does not use the PAP technique. That leaves one other option: the PERT.
Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT)
The PERT, also known as the three-point estimating technique, uses three estimates of time to complete a
task. The three estimates are the most likely, most pessimistic, and most optimistic. The most likely time is
the effort (usually in hours) to complete a task under normal or reasonable conditions. The most pessimistic
time is the effort to complete a task under the worst conceivable circumstances. The most optimistic is the
effort to complete a task under the best or ideal circumstances. The three variables are then used to calculate
an expected time to complete a task, as shown below:
Task 1.3.2.1 Determine type of entertainment/music
This estimating technique accounts for the level of effort to complete a task after accounting for all the
parameters to do the work. The estimator assumes that a person is 100 percent productive during the time to
complete the task. Realistically, of course, no one is 100 percent productive. Some time is inevitably spent
being nonproductive, so the hour estimates are adjusted to account for this nonproductive time (e.g., telephone
calls, meetings, break times). This time has no direct relationship to the work being done; the results have no
impact on progress on the actual work. Below is an example of how to calculate the revised expected time:
Task 10.3 Coordinate transportation (ground and air)
Estimate to perform work = 500 hours
500 hours 1.10 (for 10% nonproductive time) = 550 hours
Revised expected time = 550 hours
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


The three-point estimating technique has its problems. For one, it is time consuming; performing the
calculations can take a long time, even when a computer is used, especially for a large project. Also, it is
laborious; performing the calculations requires considerable thinking and searching for reliable information.
Lastly, not too many people understand the reasons for taking this approach; its underpinnings are probability
and bell curve analysis, which can be intimidating and too academic for some people.
How to Reevaluate an Estimate
Sometimes you might feel uncomfortable with an estimate. Perhaps you suspect it is unrealistic. Perhaps
you think the reasoning behind it is faulty. Perhaps you do not trust the people making the estimate.
Whatever the reason, you can take several actions to validate the estimate.
You can check the historical records of other projects that dealt with similar work. Sometimes, however,
such data are either difficult to obtain or unavailable.
You can seek a second opinion. It might mean going to someone on another project where similar work was
performed. It might mean going to an outside expert or organization for an evaluation.
You can benchmark one or more tasks. It may mean comparing the estimates with similar ongoing or
completed projects, either inside or outside your company.
You can apply the Delphi approach. Simply identify a number of people to provide input on an estimate.
Then make the adjustment and resubmit the estimate to them for further adjustment. The adjustment ends
once you gain concurrence or are comfortable with the result.
Finally, you can conduct peer reviews. Once all the estimates are complete, you can assemble everyone in a
room to discuss the estimate for each task. Assumptions and issues may arise that will call into question the
validity of some estimates. New estimates can then be developed.
The technique, however, does offer four benefits. It forces people to think seriously about the time to
complete a task; the three variables require looking at as many parameters as possible to calculate a realistic
estimate. The estimate is more reliable than other estimating techniques; it accounts for many parameters to
compensate for being too optimistic or pessimistic. It improves communication; discussion over the
parameters that relate to each variable forces people to communicate to come to a conclusion. It identifies
issues and assumptions early. When calculating each variable, people must identify issues and assumptions.
Title
-----------
To ignore issues and assumptions adds to the cost of addressing them later in the project cycle.
What Happens When No One Wants to Give the Project Manager an Estimate?
Project managers often lack formal authority over the people on their teams. This is especially the case in a
matrix environment, where people report to a functional manager and may support several projects
simultaneously.
Sometimes project managers just do not get cooperation from team members. The team members may fear
commiting themselves, hate to wrestle with unknowns or ambiguities, or just not like the project manager.
What, then, is a project manager to do?
Project managers have several options:
1.They can document the refusal to cooperate in a memo and address it to the functional manager.
This takes advantage of formal authority to get the estimate.
2.They can hold a team meeting, where everyone can discuss and share their estimates in the
presence of other team members. This takes advantage of peer pressure to get the estimate.
3.They can solicit input from other people. Then they present the estimate to the uncooperative team
member and formally request his or her feedback. This takes advantage of professional pride.
4.They can make the estimate themselves and inform the person in a memo that unless there is
acceptance by a certain date, the accuracy of the estimate will be assumed. This takes advantage of
time pressure.
Of the four estimating techniques, Perry elects the three-point estimating technique. He believes that it will
provide more-reliable estimates and also offer many other benefits. So, using the three-point estimating
technique requires Perry to keep in mind the following points.
1.He must get input estimates from the people who will do the actual work. He appreciates their
knowledge of what is required to complete the work. He also knows that getting their input will
encourage commitment to their assigned tasks. It is one thing to follow someones dictate of the hours
to do the work; it is another when he does the estimate himself.
2.He must look at the historical records of other projects. Rather than apply the estimating technique
for all tasks, he may uncover some reliable estimates that can be reused for similar tasks. He is cautious
enough to realize that circumstances are not always exactly the same from one project to another.
Consequently, the reusable estimate may require revision. Also, he reminds himself that it is still a good
idea to get input from people who will do the work.
3.He must identify and document the assumptions and parameters used to derive the estimates. Doing
this is important for two reasons. First, he and others will better understand the rationale behind the
estimates. Second, he can also determine what has changed since making the estimate and make
revisions accordingly.
4.He must maintain consistency in the estimating process. He avoids using the three-point estimate
technique for some tasks and not for others. Otherwise, he will mix apples with oranges, with some
estimates being realistic, optimistic, or pessimistic. A lack of discipline in this regard can result in an
unrealistic schedule.
5.He must make the estimates public. After getting feedback, he will publish the estimates. He does
not hide the estimates, as though they were his personal golf scores or bowling averages. By publishing
the estimates, Perry knows that people will feel a subtle pressure to use them.
6.He must understand that the estimates are approximations, not accuracies. Circumstances change
that make estimates irrelevant. That requires reestimating during the project to increase the reliability
and validity of the overall estimate. Ideally, an estimate has the highest confidence level, which
becomes more possible as a project progresses through its cycle.
Factors to Consider in Drawing Up Estimates
Estimators consider many factors when performing their calculations. These include:
Availability of nonlabor support
Clarity and definitiveness of scope
Complexity of the work
Degree of available information to estimate
Degree of uncertainty or risk in achieving the outcome
Experience, knowledge, and expertise of the team members
Financial constraints on the project
History of similar work performed
Legal constraints on the project
Location of team members working on the task
Number of people assigned to the task
Number of potential interruptions
Priority of the task
Productivity of team members
Project size
Standardization of processes related to the task
Structure versus unstructured nature of the work to be performed
Whether the completion date of the task is dictated
When estimating, Perry will consider Parkinsons law. He knows that too much available time to perform a
task is almost as troublesome as too little. Parkinsons law, of course, says that work expands to fill the time
available. In other words, if given ten hours to complete a task when it ordinarily takes five hours, people will
take ten hours. So Perry treats Parkinsons law seriously.
Perry is now ready for the next big planning action: developing a schedule.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Did you identify all the work package items in the work breakdown structure?
2.Did you select the most appropriate estimating technique? What are the reasons for your choice?
3.With at least the core team members, did you get time estimates for the tasks they are responsible
for completing?
4.If you meet resistance, how do you plan to overcome it?
5.If necessary, how will you reevaluate estimates? Review historical records? Apply the Delphi
approach?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 8
Schedule Development and the Network Diagram
With the statement of work and the work estimates completed, Perry is now ready to do some scheduling. In
so doing, he will juggle six factors: scope, time, duration, tasks, logic, and resources. The scope is described
in the SOW. Time is the hour estimate to complete each taskin other words, the estimates. Duration is the
hour figure converted to flow time for completing each task and, consequently, the entire project. Tasks are
the entries in the WBS. Logic is the sequence of tasks. And resources are the labor and nonlabor investments
assigned to each task. But all of this will become clearer as we explain more about scheduling.
What Scheduling Is
Scheduling entails making a logical sequence of tasks and then calculating start and stop dates for each task.
The results are displayed as a diagram.
A schedule is only useful if people are willing to commit themselves to maintaining it. Therefore, Perry sits
down with his core team and determines the logical sequence of tasks. He has everyone look at the big
picture, tying together all the tasks. They use this perspective to draw a network diagram, like the one in
Exhibit 8-1. The network diagram displays the logical relationships between the tasks.
Network diagramming may initially seem complex, especially if youve not had previous experience drawing
flowcharts. The advantages, however, are great. By constructing the diagram, you focus on the project goal
and discover the appropriate approach. Difficult issues become apparent, so the effort and expense of dealing
with them later is avoided. In addition, the diagram enables easier tracking of performance because it is based
on the work-package level items in the WBS. Finally, making forecasts and what-if scenarios is easier.
Title
-----------
Warning Signs of Bad Scheduling Practices
Bad scheduling practices can tarnish the credibility of a schedule. Watch for these two common indicators
of bad scheduling:
Warning Sign Number 1: Sometimes people are unsure of the future, so rather than calculate an end
date for a task, they write TBD, or to be determined. It not only represents unclear and
incomplete thinking but also opens the opportunity for guesswork and poor oversight of tasks.
Warning Sign Number 2: Occasionally people will develop schedules that contain too much
negative float (being too tight) or too much positive float (being too loose). Either way, it indicates a
problem with the schedule, especially one of realism. Too much negative float indicates that the
schedule cannot be realistically accomplished; too much positive float indicates that estimates for the
tasks are too low.
Task Dependencies and Date Scheduling
A network diagram will show one or more of the following relationships, or dependencies, between tasks.
Finish-to-Start
An earlier activity, or the predecessor, is completed and the next one, the successor, is begun, as illustrated in
Exhibit 8-2. Sometimes the succeeding task is not begun immediately; there is, in other words, a lapse of time
between the end of the predecessor and the start of the successor. That interval is called lag. A task can have
one or more predecessors or successors.
Exhibit 8-1.Network diagram.
Exhibit 8-2.Finish-to-start relationship.
Start-to-Start
Two activities are begun around the same time, as displayed in Exhibit 8-3. Sometimes one task is begun just
a little later than the other; the gap between the start of one task and the beginning of the other is also called
lag.
Finish-to-Finish
Two activities are finished around the same time, as shown in Exhibit 8-4. Sometimes one task will finish
earlier than the other, yet each must finish before its successor is begun. The time between the finish of one
and the other is also called lag.
Exhibit 8-3.Start-to-start relationship.
Exhibit 8-4.Finish-to-finish relationship.
Having identified all the dependencies between the tasks, Perry can apply the time estimates to each task. But
the raw time estimates must be converted to some meaningful value. For starting purposes only, Perry
converts the hour estimates into workdays. He divides the hours by 8 to derive the number of days needed to
complete the task. He then uses this duration, or flow time, to calculate the start and stop date for each task.
Actually, Perry calculates two sets of start and stop dates: early and late start dates, and early and late finish
dates. The early start and early finish dates are the first pair to calculate. The early start date is the earliest
time a task can be begun. The early finish date is the earliest time a task can be completed. These dates are
determined by comparing the duration of a task with the dates for the preceding and succeeding tasks.
Why Some People Dont Do Scheduling
Occasionally you run into people who do not like schedules. Sometimes that person is even the project
manager.
There are all sorts of reasons for this reluctance. People might feel the time or effort expended to build the
schedule exceeds the value gained. Or they might not want to commit themselves.
If you are working with someone who is reluctant to schedule, you have several options. You can document
a persons reluctance in a memo and send it to higher-level management. You can hold a group meeting and
cover the schedule in general, letting peer pressure prompt the person to cooperate. A related tactic is to
apply the Delphi method by encouraging input from everyone, then make changes, recirculate for feedback,
and repeat the cycle until everyone is satisfied with the results.
Some dates may not be logically derived from a network diagram. For example, certain tasks may have to
start no earlier than a specific date or may not finish earlier or later than a specific time. In some cases, tasks
may have to begin or finish on a specified date; these are known as constraint dates. Likewise, the start or
finish date of a task may depend on the start or completion of a task in another project. The output of one
project, for example, may feed another. Under these circumstances, the task has an external dependency that
must be considered when calculating start and finish dates.
Perrys Scheduling Method
Heres how Perry calculates the early start and early finish dates for his tasks. First, he assigns activity
numbers to the tasks in the WBS and converts the time estimates into flow times, as shown below:
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Activity Number Task Description Hours Duration (Hours/8)
6.1-1.1
Identify limousine service to church 24
3
6.1.1.2
Coordinate limousine service to church 8
1
6.1.2.1
Determine transportation requirements to church 24
3
6.1.2.2
Coordinate transportation to church 16
2
6.1.2.5
Arrange for valet service for church 8
1
Next, Perry logically ties all the tasks together in a network diagram. (A network diagram was shown in
Exhibit 8-1.) After determining the durations and sequences, Perry calculates the early start and early finish
dates for each task and then the entire project. He performs the forward pass, by moving from the first task in
the network diagram up through the last.
Now, as shown in Exhibit 8-5, Perry knows that task 6.1.1.1 will begin on 8:00 A.M., April 1. He also knows
that the previous task was completed the day before. He knows, too, that the duration is three days, meaning
the task will be done on April 1, 2, and 3, finishing at 5:00 P.M. on the April 3. Task 6.1.2.1 is the successor
and it will begin on April 4 at 8:00 A.M. It, too, has a duration of three days and is completed at 5:00 P.M. on
April 6.
Two successor tasks follow 6.1.2.1. They both will begin on the day after 6.1.2.1 is completed, April 7. Task
6.1.2.2 has a duration of two days, so it is completed at 5:00 P.M. on April 8. Task 6.1.1.2 has a duration of
one day, so its completion date is April 7.
Exhibit 8-5.Forward pass (where ES is early start, EF is early finish).
Task 6.1.2.5 cannot be begun until its two predecessor tasks are finished. The one that is finished the furthest
Title
-----------
out6.1.2.2must end before 6.1.2.5 can begin. Hence, 6.1.2.5 will begin on April 9 and, with a duration of
one day, will be completed on April 9.
Perry now calculates the late start and late finish dates for each task. Using the same durations and
dependencies in the network diagram, he moves from right to left, beginning with the very last task and
calculating the late start and late finish dates. This movement from right to left is the backward pass, as
shown in Exhibit 8-6.
Assuming that the finish date to task 6.1.2.5 has been set as April 9, Perry can begin the backward pass. He
knows that 6.1.2.5 has a duration of one day and, consequently, begins on that same day, providing a late start
date of April 9. He realizes that task 6.1.2.5 has two predecessors, 6.1.1.2 and 6.1.2.2. Since they each finish
the day before, their late finish dates are April 8. Task 6.1.2.2 has a duration of two days and, consequently,
has a late start date of April 7. Since task 6.1.1.2 is a concurrent activity, and has a shorter duration, it can
begin as far back as April 7, the same late start date as 6.1.2.2. Since 6.1.2.1 is the predecessor to both 6.1.1.2
and 6.1.2.2, it must have a late finish date of April 6. Since task 6.1.2.1s duration is three days, its late start
date is April 4. And since task 6.1.1.1 is the predecessor of 6.1.2.1, it must finish the day before, on April 3;
with a duration of three days, it must have a late start on April 1.
Is Work Group Participation the Best Way?
In many environments, project managers develop schedules without input or feedback from the people who
will be doing the work. There are several reasons for this.
One is the time required to obtain this input. Getting people involved adds time, and the more people, the
more time to develop the schedule. Also, the project manager has overall responsibility for the project. The
project manager has the big picture perspective and can ensure that all the pieces fit together.
The counterargument is that the work group should have a say in building the schedule. Although
participation adds to the flow time, it does offer some powerful advantages. By obtaining input, the project
manager solicits ownership in and commitment to the schedule, especially for the work each person is
responsible to do. Work group participation also helps to raise issues and question assumptions early to
preclude future misunderstandings and problems.
Exhibit 8-6.Backward pass (where LS is late start, LF is late finish).
Note:this is only a partial description of the network diagram for the wedding. Its a snapshot presented here
to illustrate the basics of network diagramming and calculating dates.
The Float
Perry now has four dates for each task: early start, early finish, late start, and late finish. These dates are
necessary to calculate the float for a task. Float is the time an activity can slide without affecting the project
completion date. For instance, if a task does not have to be begun right away, there may be time to slide. Or if
it does not have to be finished as early as possible, there is time to let the date slide a bit.
Perry uses a simple calculation to determine float: the difference between the early start date and the late
finish date, minus the duration, as shown in Exhibit 8-7.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Tasks given a zero float means that they cannot slide; if they do, then the project end date will slide, too. The
one or more paths through the network diagram that have tasks with zero floats are called the critical path, as
shown in Exhibit 8-7.
There are, in reality, two types of float. The float just described is known as total float and affects the project
end date. The other type is the free float, which occurs on noncritical paths. This is the time that an activity
can slide without impacting the start date of its successor.
Exhibit 8-7.Critical path showing float.
Other Types of Network Diagrams
Perry has used one type of network diagram, but several other types exist. Perrys choice is the precedence
diagramming method. It is used most often in nonconstruction applications, such as in the information
systems, pharmaceutical, and engineering industries.
For construction applications, the arrow diagramming method is used. It, too, relies on relationships, but they
take a different form. The arrow diagram uses nodes to represent events and arrows to describe the task
between those nodes. Also, this technique uses dummy activities that consume no resources, unlike the
precedence diagramming method.
Another diagramming technique is the bar, or Gantt, chart. The fundamental difference between a bar chart
and a network diagram is that the former does not show dependencies. The bar chart displays a list of tasks
and, for each one, a bar shows the flow time or duration. As Exhibit 8-8 shows, a standard bar chart does not
present all four dates for a task.
The bar chart often is useful, for several reasons. It is easy to read, showing only one set of start and finish
dates. The bar itself provides a visual means to check the status of a task. It is also excellent for rolling up,
or summarizing the progress of a related group of tasks. Thus, its simplicity, visual orientation, and
summarization capabilities make it an excellent tool for reporting to senior management. It gives senior
Title
-----------
management the big picture rather than the details. A bar chart using roll-ups is shown in Exhibit 8-9.
Exhibit 8-8.Basic bar chart.
Exhibit 8-9.Roll-up bar chart.
The milestone chart is a type of bar chart. It has the outlay of a bar chart but also has an icon or symbol to
mark the occurrence of an event. The icon has a duration of zero. This event might be receiving approval or
the completion of a task. Exhibit 8-10 is an example of a milestone chart. Like the basic bar chart, it is best
used when reporting to senior management.
Exhibit 8-10. Milestone chart.
Task Duration
Month
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun
1.0 Parties
2.0 Stationery
3.0 Photography/
Videography
4.0 Gifts and favors
5.0 Attire
6.0 Transportation
7.0 Fees
8.0 Flowers
9.0 Honeymoon
10.0 Guests

Perry uses the network diagram to plan the details of the project and manage it from day to day. He uses the
bar chart for reporting to senior management.
The Schedule as a Road Map
Using the work breakdown structure and the time estimates that he developed earlier, Perry builds a realistic
schedule. The schedule provides a road map for him and all team members to follow.
However, he realizes that a schedule can help him to accomplish only so much. He also needs to organize his
project so that he can efficiently and effectively execute his plan.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Did you develop a network diagram or a bar chart? Or both?
2.If you developed a network diagram, did you:
Assign task numbers to each item in the WBS? Is the numbering scheme meaningful?
Identify the people who will help you put the logic together?
Tie all the tasks together to form a complete, logical diagram?
Convert the hours for each task to flow time or duration?
Calculate the early and late start and finish dates for each task?
Consider the constraints, such as imposed dates, when calculating dates?
Consider relationship types and lag?
Calculate float to identify the critical path(s)?
Obtain all core team members concurrence?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 9
Resource Allocation:
Aligning People and Other Resources With Tasks
For the Smythe Project to succeed, Perry must have sufficient resourcesthat is, both people and thingsand
use them efficiently and effectively. Resource allocation, a part of the organizing function, allows him to do
that.
As Perry knows, a project manager has a wide variety of resources to employ, including people, supplies,
equipment, and facilities. People, for most projects in general and for the Smythe Project in particular, are the
predominant resource and, consequently, the major focus here to illustrate resource allocation principles.
Resource allocation involves four basic steps:
1. Identify the Tasks Involved
Perry goes directly to the network diagram to identify the tasks involved in his project. These tasks are the
same ones as at the work package level in the work breakdown structure (see Chapter 6).
2. Assign Resources to Those Tasks
Perry starts determining how to best apply his resources. When assigning people resources, he considers
several factors, including:
Availability
Available budget
Education/training
Equipment to do work
Expertise
Individuals desire or interest
Title
-----------
Knowledge
Personality
Teaming
Perry also considers behavioral factors, such as personality. He recognizes that some people may not be
suitable to do certain tasks (e.g., an engineer may well be unsuitable to do the work of a salesman).
Perry also considers the motivational tools at his disposal. He will use job enlargement, for instance, to
challenge certain people to assume more responsibilities. He uses job enrichment to motivate other team
members. And he considers job rotation. Of course, Perry recognizes that there are some risks, mainly the
inability of the person to handle different or greater responsibilities. However, Perry is willing to take the
chance in applying his people resources, since the potential payback in productivity will easily outweigh the
risks.
When allocating resources, Perry applies the following heuristics (or rules of thumb):
With noncritical tasks, give preference to the task with the least float.
Give priority to tasks on the critical path.
If two activities are critical and have the same float, give preference to the more complex task.
3. Build a Resource Profile
The resource profile graphically displays the planned and actual use of one or more resources over the
duration of a task, group of tasks, or entire project. The display is often a histogram, as shown in Exhibit 9-1.
The x-axis shows a time continuum reflecting the early or late start and finish dates. The y-axis shows the
cumulative hours to perform one or more tasks. The continuous vertical bars profile the cumulative hours that
someone will work on one or more concurrent tasks.
The initial histogram often has an irregular shape. The high points are peaks, reflecting greater use of
resources at a specific point in time. The low points are valleys, reflecting lower use of resources at a specific
point in time. Exhibit 9-1 is an example of a histogram with several peaks and valleys.
An irregular shape to the histogram reflects that resources are being employed inefficiently or ineffectively.
The peaks may indicate that the schedule is too tight (i.e., compressed durations), thereby requiring extensive
overtime to complete the work. The schedule may be too loose (i.e.,
Exhibit 9-1.Unleveled histogram.
durations too spread out). The valleys may indicate that too much time is available to complete a task. Either
way, such scenarios can negatively affect motivation, performance, and productivity. Too much duration
communicates a lack of importance or urgency. Too little duration can lead to burnout, negative conflict, and
work owing to oversights or mistakes.
Therefore, Perry attempts to reduce the number of peaks and valleys by smoothing out the histogram as much
as possible, similar to what appears in Exhibit 9-2. The result is called a leveled histogram, and the process of
smoothing it out is called level loading. Of course, a histogram is rarely flat.
4. Adjust the Schedule or Pursue Alternatives
Perry can level his histogram in several ways. He can change the logic of the schedule so that the number of
concurrent activities someone is as. signed is less. He can change the relationship between two activities (e.g.,
change a start-to-start relationship to a finish-to-start one) or add lag between the two activities to reduce
concurrency. He can also reduce the float of noncritical activities by lengthening their duration without
changing the total hours of effort. Finally, he can reduce the output from certain tasks, thereby leveling the
work.
When it becomes impossible to alter the schedule, then Perry can rearrange assignments to lower the working
hours per day or employ an alternative person, such as a consultant or contract employee (see Consultants
and Outsources, below).
Exhibit 9-2.Leveled histogram.
Overtime and Burnout
On many projects, especially ones where meeting the completion date is critical, overtime is the norm rather
than the rule. Periodic overtime is fine, but if taken to the extreme, it can have long-term effects on team
members and influence overall performance on the project.
From a behavioral perspective, extensive overtime can result in burnout, which is a common condition in
the information systems world. Burnout can lead to omissions, rework, and scrapped work, all contributing
to lower productivity. From a schedule, cost, and quality perspective, excessive overtime has an effect, too.
Peoples performance becomes impaired.
Too much overtime is symptomatic of major project management problems. There may be an unrealistic
schedule, a management-by-crisis situation, poorly trained people, inadequate equipment or facilities, low
morale, or lack of teamwork. If excessive overtime becomes the norm, serious replanning is required.
To avoid overtime problems, level the major peaks in the histogram.
Exhibit 9-3. Work assignments.
Task No. Description Duration (Days) Assigned to Hours/Day
6.1.1.1 Identify limousine service to church 3 Ewing 8
6.1.1.2 Coordinate limousine service to church 1 Ewing 8
6.1.1.3 Identify limousine service to reception 3 Ewing 8
6.1.1.4 Coordinate limousine service to reception 1 Eisenberg 8
6.1.2.1 Determine transportation requirements to
church
3 Ewing 8
6.1.2.2 Coordinate transportation to church 1 Eisenburg 8
6.1.2.3 Determine transportation requirements to
and from reception
2 Ewing 8
6.1.2.4 Coordinate transportation to and from
reception
1 Eisenberg 8
6.1.2.5 Arrange for valet service for church 1 Smith 8
6.1.2.6 Arrange for valet service for reception 1 Smith 8
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


How Perry Levels the Load
Perry develops a histogram for tasks related to transportation (6.0 in the work breakdown structure). He
notices that the histogram for Ewing has high peaks in the beginning and a sharp drop several days later.
Exhibit 9-3 shows the assignments of everyone to this task, Exhibit 9-4 shows the original histogram for
Ewing, and Exhibit 9-5 shows that portion of the network diagram related to transportation.
Perry figures he has several options:
1.Switch the start-to-start relationship to finish-to-start for tasks 6.1.1.3 or 6.1.2.3, or both with
6.1.1.1.
2.Double the duration but not the work effort (hours) for 6.1.1.2, which is a noncritical-path task.
3.Replace Ewing on certain concurrent tasks (e.g., 6.1.1.1, 6.1.1.3, or 6.1.2.3, or both) with additional
help (e.g., consultant, contractor, or outsource). This will reduce the peak for Ewing.
4.Change the precedence relationships between tasks.
After making the changes to the assignments and changing the precedence relationships (see Exhibit 9-6), he
generates a leveled histogram for Ewing (see Exhibit 9-7).
Consultants and Outsources
Consultants
From time to time, project managers will not have sufficient labor resources to complete their projects. A
solution is to hire consultants.
But hiring consultants should not be done lightly, since their services can prove expensive and the quality of
their output is often debatable.
Take the following steps when hiring consultants.
1.Know exactly what you expect from the consultant. Is it a deliverable product? Is it a document or
just advice in oral form?
2.Look at several consultants rather than one as a sole source. Reliance on one consultant increases
dependency.
Title
-----------
Exhibit 9-4.Unleveled histogram for Ewing.
Exhibit 9-5.Network diagram (portion for transportation).
3.Conduct a background investigation. Who is on their client list? How satisfied are the clients with
their work? What is their reputability in performing that type of work?
4.Monitor the performance. Expect periodic reviews to preclude the unexpected lack of delivery. Have
those reviews documented to prevent legal problems regarding the quality of output.
5.Include the tasks of consultants in the work breakdown structure and on the schedule. If
nonperformance occurs, it is easier to show the impact on the overall progress of the project, at least
from a schedule and cost perspective.
6.Ensure that the terms and conditions of an agreement exactly describe the deliverable. Dont rely on
general statements, which can eventually lead to disagreements that can only be resolved in the courts.
Exhibit 9-6.Network diagram with logic change.
Outsourcing Services
An alternative to using consultants is outsourcing, by which an independent vendor provides a service and
assumes responsibility for the results. For example, a project manager might outsource the development and
delivery of a deliverable or component of the product being built.
Outsourcing has its advantages. It can help shift the development of difficult, complex deliverables to
expertise that does not exist on the team. It can shift nonessential deliverables to outside vendors so that the
team can focus on critical matters. Finally, it can allow for flexibility in responding to a fast-paced
environment, since less is invested in a project infrastructure and the outsourcing can be canceled without
investing too much.
Outsourcing has its disadvantages, too. The potential for losing control may be high. The work can cost more
initially. And it takes time to find a reliable outsourcing vendor.
To ensure that you make a good outsourcing decision:
1.Do an analysis to determine if outsourcing is a better option than having the team do the work.
2.Select from several outsourcing vendors. Compare each one, not just on a cost basis but also on
reputability of work and service.
3.Identify what is too critical to outsource. A bad outsourcing decision can have disastrous results on
the entire project.
4.Identify what you can outsource. Often, these are services or deliverables not essential to the
outcome of the project.
5.If outsourcing something critical, then ensure that reviews and audits are stipulated in the contract.
Actually, the rights for reviews and audits should be incorporated in the contract as a general rule, but
especially for critical services or deliverables.
Exhibit 9-7.Leveled histogram for Ewing.
Accelerated Projects
Its called fast-tracking. It is building a product or delivering a service in a very short period of time, usually
undertaken for a time-to-market circumstance in an emergency. Information system projects that must
deliver an application under market pressure quite commonly fit this category.
People on accelerated projects work at a feverish pace for a short time. There are usually several concurrent
activities.
Fast-tracking works best when the project has a previous history, the team members are highly skilled and
have previous experience, and the opportunity for reuse exists. The emphasis is on getting results quickly
and correctly. Little time is available for experimentation, even creativity.
The downside to fast-tracking is burnout. While the focus on results does provide opportunities for effective
teaming, failures can be magnified and lead to finger pointing. Fast-tracking also requires constant training
and retraining so people can perform quickly.
Fast-tracking accelerates the life of a project. In exchange for speedy delivery, however, it can have
long-term negative consequences.
Summing Up Resource Allocation
The principles of resource allocation apply to inanimate objects such as desks and supplies no less than to
people. In either case allocating resources requires identifying the tasks, making assignments, building
profiles, and making adjustments to satisfy requirements. There is, however, one major difference. When
doing people allocation, Perry must be sensitive to their psychological needs (e.g., feelings, values), which, of
course, is not necessary for inanimate objects. This psychological factor becomes especially important not
only when Perry assigns tasks but also when he starts to organize his team to efficiently and effectively
achieve the goals of the project.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Did you identify the tasks to allocate your resources?
2.Do you know all the different types of resources you will need?
3.Is there a resource pool where you can get all the resources you need? If not, will you need
consultants? Will you need to out-source?
4.Did you assign people to all the tasks?
5.Did you run a resource histogram for each person?
6.Did you need to or attempt to level each of the histograms?
7.When you assign people to tasks, do you consider behavioral as well as technical factors?
8.If you use consultants or outsourcing, did you perform a background analysis first?
9.If overtime appears in the histograms, is it constant or sporadic? If the former, what steps are you
willing to take to deal with the effects of burnout?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 10
Team Organization
Over the years, Perry has seen the symptoms of poor team organization. Some projects have too many leaders,
leaving only a few people to do the work and making coordination difficult. Other projects have too many
layers of management, impeding effective communication; team members become frustrated, waiting for all
the leaders to reach agreement or gain approvals. To augment frustration levels, tasks frequently are unclear,
lacking definitions of roles and responsibilities.
Good organization makes sense; yet project managers often give too little attention to organizing their group.
Frequently, teams are an assembly of people and nothing more. Some project managers fear alienating people
by setting up a project organization. Others lack an appreciation for its contribution to project success. Still
others have a preference for an unofficial organizational structure.
Through the function of organization, Perry can realize many advantages. His team can operate more
efficiently, since responsibilities and reporting relationships will be clearly defined. It can operate more
effectively, because each person will know what is expected of him or her. The team has higher morale,
because roles and reporting relationships will be clear which in turn reduces the opportunities for conflict.
Ten Prerequisites for Effective Organization
Perry must satisfy some preliminary requirements to build a formal organization, especially one that handles
medium to large projects like his:
1.He must know the project goals. This knowledge will help to determine how to best arrange his
resources.
2.He must know all the players. This knowledge will help him to determine who will support him
directly and who will provide ad hoc support.
3.He must understand the political climate. Although the team may be temporary, the project may be
around for a long time.
4.He must receive preliminary concurrence on the project organization from all the major players
Title
-----------
(e.g., senior management, customers).
5.He must determine the appropriate span of control. This means determining how many people he
can effectively manage before establishing an additional layer of management (e.g., appointing team
leaders).
6.He must publish the organization chart as early as possible. This action will clarify roles early and
reduce the opportunity for conflict. It will also make assigning responsibilities easier.
7.He must consider how much autonomy to grant people on the project. This will depend on how
much control he wants to maintain. If he wants tight control, he will limit the autonomy he grants to
project participants.
8.He must consider issues of authority, responsibility, and accountability. How much authority will he
have and how much can he grant? How much responsibility can he relinquish and still be accountable
for the results?
9.He must consider how to group the functions of the project team. Should he mix them or segregate
them? If the latter, how will he encourage information sharing, communication, and teaming?
10.He must identify the line and staff functions. The goal of the project will help determine the
positions. Line functions contribute directly to the results; these are typically people on the core team.
Staff functions do not contribute directly to the results and ordinarily they are not part of the core team.
Types of Organizational Structure
There are two basic types of organizational structures for a project: task force and matrix. The task force
structure is shown in Exhibit 10-1.
The task force is a group of people assembled to complete a specific goal. The team is completely focused on
that goal and, consequently, devotes its entire energies to its accomplishment. By its very nature, task forces
are temporary; the team is disassembled once the goal is accomplished. It also usually operates autonomously,
with its own budget and authority.
The task force has the advantage of giving visibility to a project. It isolates team members from organizational
myopia and frees them from daily administrivia. It enables creativity and experimentation within the confines
of the goal and scope of the project.
Despite these advantages, Perry does not like the task force structure, at least for the Smythe Project. Since a
task force would last for only a fixed duration, theres a danger that few people would have loyalty to the
project and stay the course. As the project experiences difficulties, some people might depart early, leaving it
vulnerable to schedule slippages and lapses in quality.
Exhibit 10-1.Task force structure.
As the project grows, too, it can become too independent, stealing people from other projects. Other
organizations and projects are robbed of badly needed expertise. As a project ends, the task force may
experience severe morale problems, as people scramble for new jobs before completing their responsibilities.
It is not uncommon for a project to experience lapses in quality as a result.
Keeping these shortcomings in mind, Perry agrees with his boss that a matrix structure is best for the Smythe
Project. A matrix structure obtains resources from functional organizations and also shares those people with
other projects. For command and control purposes, people report to their functional managers but support one
or more project managers. A generic matrix structure is shown in Exhibit 10-2 and the one for the Smythe
wedding is shown in Exhibit 10-3.
The matrix structure offers several advantages. It allows for sharing people with heavy expertise among
several projects. People dont need to look for a new job as the project concludes. The project manager can
acquire people with the right skills at the right time, thereby reducing the need to keep people on when they
are not needed; this helps keep the cost lower. The matrix structure also gives senior management flexibility
in changing the scope or stopping the project owing to different market conditions.
Perry realizes, though, that a matrix structure presents challenges. It makes planning difficult, especially if
projects are sharing resources. Often, he must negotiate with functional and other managers to obtain peoples
help.
Exhibit 10-2.Matrix structure.
A matrix structure can wreak havoc on morale, too. Team members on multiple projects may be forced to
determine which project to give attention to. Sometimes the competition is so keen that individuals become
pawns in a power struggle among functional and project managers. That struggle can last a long time, adding
to team angst. Finally, the matrix structure often violates the unity-of-command principle (a single superior to
whom subordinates report).
To tackle these challenges, Perry recognizes the stress a matrix structure places on team members. He will
coordinate closely with functional and other project managers to facilitate availability and try to integrate his
project with other projects. He will encourage greater communication, information sharing, and bonding.
Finally, he will stress flexibility; change is a way of life in the matrix environment, since priorities and
resource availabilities constantly change.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Virtual Teams
Recent advances in information systems have brought unparalleled changes to business, not just technically
but also in managing projects. These changes include e-mail, the Internet, groupware, and client-server
technology. Technologies such as these have enabled team members to work autonomously at remote
locations during all time periods (e.g., mornings, evenings). But a project team may never meet face-to-face
with some people and will only interact electronically. That is the nature of virtual teams.
There are many advantages to a virtual team. It reduces the need for expensive facilities. Team members feel
greater freedom, working with less supervision. A side benefit is a flatter organization chart, too.
Exhibit 10-3.Organization chart reflecting matrix structure of Smythe Project.
While sounding like a dream come true, reality may provide a different picture. Virtual teams can pose tough
challenges. The first is how to provide support for these virtual team members. There are issues concerning
hardware and software, plus administrative matters such as accessibility to the project library and ways of
collecting information nonelectronically.
Second is how to overcome the purported loneliness that affects some virtual team members. Many work
alone, in remote geographical locations. Their opportunities for social interaction and camaraderie are limited.
Third is the challenge of coordinating the activities of team members. With members geographically
dispersed and in different time zones, coordination can be a nightmare. Since oversight is difficult, project
managers cannot closely monitor work. Similarly, communication usually involves more than e-mail. There
must be a way to discuss major project activities.
Some ways to handle these challenges include:
Conducting frequent face-to-face meetings and holding social gatherings
Developing objective ways to measure performance and completion criteria
Empowering people to assume responsibility and accountability for results
Title
-----------
Establishing time commitments for team members to respond to each other
Providing a standard suite of hardware and software tools
SWAT Teams
Special Weapons and Tactics (SWAT) teams are a growing presence in project management. These are small
groups of individuals who are experts not just in project management but also in other subjects. In the sense
that their objective is to move quickly to complete their mission and pull out, these groups are like the police
SWAT teams from which they get their name. Specifically, a project SWAT team must quickly set up the
appropriate project management and technical disciplines at the beginning of a project. Once the disciplines
have been established, the team relinquishes control to a project manager and his group, who are responsible
for completing the project.
SWAT team work is intense. By the time its work is completed, it will have developed and implemented a
complete project plan, from estimates to schedules.
Although hard skills (e.g., expertise with software and hardware) are important, soft skills are important, too.
For example, SWAT team members must solicit buy-in for their work. Active listening, facilitation,
communication, and teaming skills are extremely important. Also important is the ability to keep calm under
pressure and a willingness to share equipment, expertise, or information.
To use SWAT teams effectively:
1.Obtain support for the work of a SWAT team by follow-on teleconferencing sessions; otherwise, the
teams effort will be wasted.
2.Be aware that working on a SWAT team can cause burnout. Morale and energy levels can plummet.
3.Provide constant training for SWAT team members. They must keep abreast of technologies in
order to provide state-of-the-art expertise. Cross-training can help, but only so far.
4.Select people for the SWAT team who can handle ambiguity. Members must be willing to tackle
projects when goals and deliverables are ill defined.
Self-Directed Work Teams
In recent years, a different approach to building teams has emerged, called a Self-Directed Work Team
(SDWT).
SDWTs are teams that have considerable autonomy while building a product or delivering a service. It is a
group of professionals sharing responsibility for results.
These teams are cross-functional, meaning that people with different disciplines and backgrounds work
together to achieve a common goal. The team decides everything, from setting priorities to allocating
resources. Other actions include selecting people, evaluating performance, and improving processes. The key
characteristic is the autonomy to make decisions without supervisory approval.
Several trends are pushing toward the SDWT concept because these teams:
Create flatter organizations
Empower employees
Encourage greater teaming
Encourage people to have a more general background
Enlarge spans of control
SDWTs are excellent candidates for applying project management ideas. Since the entire team is responsible
for the results, all members must help lead, define, plan, organize, control, and close the project. The tools and
techniques of project management enable teams to do that.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Did you determine whether your project organization has or should have a task force or matrix
structure?
2.Regardless of the type, did you consider the following when organizing the team:
Accountability issues?
Authority issues?
Basis for grouping functions?
Concurrence from the right people?
Level of autonomy for team members?
Players?
Political climate?
Project goals?
Responsibility issues?
Span of control?
When to publish the organization chart?
Which are the line and which are the staff functions?
3.If a task force structure, what can you do to deal with its shortcomings (e.g., decline in loyalty)?
4.If a matrix structure, what can you do to deal with its shortcomings (e.g., competition among
projects for key people)?
5.If you have a virtual team, even partially, how will you deal with the challenges (e.g., ongoing
technical support) often associated with such teams?
6.If you have a SWAT team, how will you overcome the challenges (e.g., burnout) often associated
with such teams?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 11
Budget Development and Cost Calculation
Nothing gets done without money. Projects are no exception, and Perry is the first to realize this.
There are many reasons for calculating costs before they are incurred. To begin, they give an idea of how
much the goals will cost to achieve. Cost calculations later become a tool for measuring the efficiency of a
project team. They also help determine priorities as the project progresses. Finally, they contribute to the
overall profitability of a company.
As project manager, Perry has several responsibilities for budgeting. He must develop budgets on a
task-by-task basis and for the entire project. He must ensure that expenditures stay within the budget allocated
for each task and the project as a whole. He seeks additional funding, if necessary. Finally, he tracks and
monitors expenditures, identifying and reporting deviations to upper management.
When estimating his costs, Perry establishes a management reserve, usually 3 to 5 percent of the total
estimate for the project, to address unexpected costs. This reserve increases the overall cost estimate for the
project.
Later, while controlling his project, Perry uses the cost estimates to compare to actual expenditures. Of
particular importance are estimates versus actual costs up to a given point. If the actual costs exceed the
estimated costs up to a specific point, an overrun exists. If the actual costs are less than the estimated costs up
to a specific point, an underrun exists. Perry looks for overruns and underruns on a task-by-task global basis.
If the feedback has an overrun, for example, Perry takes corrective action.
Different Kinds of Costs
Perry knows that many items in a project cost money. The typical ones are:
Equipment (purchase, lease, rental, and usage)
Facilities (office space, warehouses)
Labor (employee, contract)
Title
-----------
Supplies (paper, pencils, toner, sundries)
Training (seminars, conferences, symposiums)
Transportation (land, sea, air)
The standard formulas for calculating these costs are:
Equipment = purchase price
or
lease price time period
or
rental price time period
Facilities = lease price time period
or
rental price time period
Labor costs = (regular hours hourly rate) + (overtime hours time and a half rate) + (overtime hours
double time rate)
Supplies = quantity unit price
Training costs = (tuition cost number of attendees) + (the sum of the labor costs for attendees)
Transportation costs = (daily, weekly, monthly, or hourly rate) (period of usage)
There are also different ways to classify costs.
Direct vs. Indirect Costs
Direct costs directly relate to the building of a product for example, materials and specialized labor.
Indirect costs are other than direct costs and not necessarily related to the building of a product for
example, rent and taxes.
Recurring vs. Nonrecurring Costs
Recurring costs appear regularly for example, long-term payments for facilities. Nonrecurring costs appear
only once for example, the purchase of equipment.
Fixed vs. Variable Costs
Fixed costs are not alterable owing to changes in work volume for example, cost of facilities usage.
Variable costs vary depending upon consumption and workload for example, cost of materials.
Activity-Based Costing (ABC)
Activity-based costing (ABC) is a process approach to accounting, giving a realistic portrait of the total
costs for a project. With traditional accounting methods, labor is seen as the primary contributor to costs,
while with ABC, overhead and materials have significant impact. Traditional accounting emphasizes
"hacking away many heads," not reducing material and overhead costs. ABC instead focuses on processes
and their improvement, not just reducing head count. It also focuses on customers, since the true cost of the
final product is passed on to the customers.
Project managers can play a major role in furthering the use of ABC. ABC also requires good definitions of
what the customer wants (statement of work), a list of the activities for meeting those wants (work
breakdown structure), and fixed monies (cost estimates) to produce the product or deliver the service.
Project managers can realistically determine direct and indirect costs and also determine what processes to
improve or remove in order to increase customer satisfaction and reduce costs.
Burdened vs. Nonburdened Labor Rates
Burdened labor rates include the cost of fringe benefits for example, insurance and floor space and
nonlabor overhead. Nonburdened rates are labor rates minus the cost of fringe benefits and overhead.
Regular vs. Overtime Labor Rates
Regular labor rates are less than or equal to 40 hours per week. Overtime labor rates are more than 40 hours
per week, including time and a half and overtime.
How to Calculate Costs
Making a reliable cost estimate depends on the amount of information available for estimating. Having more
information means you have greater ability to discern the elements that constitute an estimate. Making a
reliable cost estimate also depends on a good work breakdown structure (WBS); see Chapter 6. And, of
course, to produce a reliable cost estimate requires a good project definition; the better the definition, the
more reliable the estimate because the parameters of the final product or service have been established; see
Chapter 5.
Obtaining a reliable cost estimate depends on good time estimates, too. Most cost estimates rely on a count of
labor hours to complete work. If the work estimate is reliable, then the costs should have an equivalent
reliability, since they represent hourly rate times total hours; see Chapter 7. Finally, estimates often are based
on assumptions. Unless identified, these assumptions can lead to misunderstandings and ultimately to
inaccurate calculations. The assumptions are spelled out in the statement of work; see Chapter 5.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


What follows is an example of how Perry estimates the costs for each task in the WBS. He uses a worksheet
format (Exhibit 11-1) to calculate the figures. The summary of his calculations is the total cost for the project,
excluding the management reserve.
Perry tracks the estimate-at-completion for each task and the management-estimate-at-completion (MEAC).
The estimate-at-completion is a combination of actual expenditures to date up to a specific point plus the
remaining estimate to complete the project. The MEAC is the actual expenditures to date plus the remaining
estimate to complete the entire project. Both the estimate-at-completion and the actual expenditures to date
give
Exhibit 11-1Worksheet for estimating costs.
Costs
($)
Labor 560.00
Telephone 12.00
Transportation 20.00
Training 0.00
Equipment 0.00
Supplies 0.00
Total Estimate 592.00
round to
600.00
Perry a good idea of how well expenditures have gone and will go if the current levels of performance
continue.
What Happens If Cost Estimates Are Too High?
Title
-----------
Frequently, project managers are asked to reduce their estimates. Top management often feels that a project
can be completed with less money. It may even declare a 10 percent across-the-board reduction for all
projects. Dealing with such commands is one of the hardest challenges facing project managers. Fortunately,
they have several options.
The project manager can communicate her reasons for the cost estimates. She can explain, for example, the
rationale behind the time estimates and the accompanying calculations. Presenting the reasons and
assumptions especially gives a persuasive argument for retaining the cost estimates.
The project manager can also develop revised cost estimates. Based on feedback from senior management,
she can select the best revised estimate.
Finally, the project manager can negotiate with the customer to reduce or revise the scope of the project,
reduce the work requirements as described in the work breakdown structure, reduce the time estimates, and
modify the assignments. Ultimately, revisions to the scope will then be reflected in the estimated costs.
The key: Identifying and Managing Costs
Money is the oil that gets projects moving and keeps them running. The Smythe Project is no exception. Perry
appreciates the importance of identifying and managing costs throughout the life of the project. He knows that
how he categorizes costs is not as important as ensuring that the project completes within budget.
Perry knows, too, that costs, along with schedules, are susceptible to positive and negative changes that may
increase or decrease the reliability of his estimates. To a large extent, this reliability will be affected by the
degree of risk associated with his schedule and cost estimates.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Did you identify all the types of costs for your project?
2.Did you identify the rates for usage and quantity that you plan to consume?
3.Did you calculate the total costs by summing the totals for each task?
4.If you elect to have a management reserve, did you determine the appropriate percent to be
multiplied against the total costs of the tasks?
5.If you received pressure from your management or the customer for having too high an estimate, did
you develop alternative ways to deal with their resistance?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 12
Risk Management
Projects can fail for a number of reasons and the risks are always high. While a project manager cannot
eliminate risk, she can prevent or mitigate its impacts by using risk management.
Managing Risk: A Four-Step Process
Risk management is the process of identifying, analyzing, controlling, and reporting risk. Risk identification
is the identification of major elements of a project and their associated risks. To do this, Perry will rely on his
and others knowledge and expertise. He will meet with core team members, the customer, and senior
management to solicit input. He will review documentation, including the statement of work, work
breakdown structure, and requirements documents. This information prepares him for the next step. Risk
analysis is the classification of those elements to different levels of risk. Perry will compare the should be
controls with the ones that do exist and will identify any discrepancies. He will also determine the probability
or likelihood each risk will materialize and whether a control is necessary. Risk control is the determination
of controls that can mitigate the risks. It involves deciding under what circumstances to take action to prevent
or mitigate the impact of a risk. Perry essentially will do contingency planning, which involves anticipating
responses to negative circumstances. Risk reporting is the act of informing team members and senior
management of those risks.
Perry knows that by managing risk, he can identify priorities, thereby focusing his energies and resources as
well as developing a meaningful project plan. The analysis of risk indicates the strengths and the weaknesses
of the project, so that he can maximize his assets and minimize his losses. It helps him to identify and put into
place the most important controls, rather try to control everything.
To perform risk management, Perry needs information, time, expertise, and perspective. The information is
necessary to understand the major processes and components, the accompanying threats, and the controls that
should be in place. It will take time to collect the information and assemble it in some meaningful form. He
will use his expertise in project management to apply risk management while maintaining a broad perspective
to avoid focusing on just one area (e.g., technical issues at the expense of business ones).
Title
-----------
Exposure
Several factors can expose projects to higher than normal risk.
Team size. The larger the team, the higher the probability of a problem arising. For example,
communications can be more difficult as the number of participants increases. The number of
interactions among people increases and thus they require greater coordination.
History. Newer projects are riskier because the processes have not been refined. The more times a
project of a similar nature has been done, the greater the likelihood of success.
Staff expertise and experience. If the staff lacks direct experience and knowledge of the subject,
people will struggle to learn as they go along, robbing the project of time and possibly introducing
errors.
Complexity. The more sophisticated a project, the greater the opportunity of a mistake or slipup.
Untested technologies, such as ones dealing with information systems or biotechnologies, are risk
laden.
Management stability. The more senior management plays musical chairs, the greater the risks of
a problem arising. With every new management comes the possibility of changed priorities and
directions. Management stability implies unity of direction, which in turn means reaching goals.
Management irritability can lead to unrealistic scheduling and inefficient use of resources.
Time compression. If a schedule is highly compressed, then the risks are magnified. Having more
time means greater flexibility and the opportunity to prevent or mitigate the impact of errors.
Resource availability. The more resources that are available, the greater the ability to respond to
problems as they arise. For example, more money brings greater ability to secure equipment or people
when needed. Plentiful resources, of course, do not guarantee protection from risk; however they do
provide the means to respond to it.
Categories of risk
Risks can be viewed as business, technical, or operational. An example of a business risk is misuse of project
funds. A technical risk is the inability to build the product that will satisfy requirements. An operational risk is
the inability of the customer to work with core team members.
Risks are either acceptable or unacceptable. An acceptable risk is one that negatively affects a task on the
noncritical path. An unacceptable risk is one that negatively affects the critical path.
Risks are either short or long term. A short-term risk has an immediate impact, such as changing the
requirements for a deliverable. A long-term risk has an impact sometime in the distant future, such as
releasing a product without adequate testing.
Risks are viewed as either manageable or unmanageable. A manageable risk is one you can live with, such as
a minor requirement change. An unmanageable risk is impossible to accommodate, such as a huge turnover of
core team members.
Finally, risks are either internal or external. An internal risk is peculiar to a project, such as the inability to get
the parts of a product to work. An external risk originates from outside the scope of the project, such as when
senior management arbitrarily cuts funding by 20 percent.
Categorizing risks is, of course, mainly an academic exercise. These classifications can help you determine
the source, relative importance, and impact to the project.
Key Concepts in Risk Management
When performing risk management, Perry remembers the following concepts.
A component is a basic element of an overall system. A project is a system consisting of components
that, in turn, can consist of subcomponents. Components can be processes, deliverables, or both.
Examples of a component are a process like determining requirements or a deliverable like a
requirements document.
A threat is the occurrence of an event that negatively affects a project in some manner. A threat
exploits a vulnerability, or exposure. An example of a threat is when there is no customer buy-in of a
schedule or requirement. A vulnerability is the inherent degree of weakness of a component, such as a
schedule having no acceptance by the customer.
Probability is the odds that something, like a threat, will occur any-where from 0 to 100 percent.
Probability determines the extent to which a risk will occur and the level of vulnerability.
Control is a measure in place to mitigate, prevent, or correct the impact of a threat. A control can be
physical, such as a required signature, or logical, such as a peer review.
Keeping the above concepts in mind, Perry can perform risk management using two approaches: quantitative
or qualitative.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


The quantitative approach relies on statistical calculation to determine risk, its probability of occurrence, and
its impact on a project. A common example of the quantitative approach is decision tree analysis, applying
probabilities to two or more outcomes. Another example is the three-point estimating technique described in
Chapter 7. Still another approach is the Monte Carlo simulation, which generates a value from a probability
distribution and other factors.
The qualitative approach relies on judgments, using criteria to determine outcomes. A common qualitative
approach is a precedence diagramming method, which uses ordinal numbers to determine priorities and
outcomes. Another approach is heuristics, or rules of thumb, to determine outcomes.
An example of a qualitative approach is to list in descending order specific processes of a project, the risk or
risks associated with each process, and the control or controls that may or should exist for each risk. See
Exhibit 12-1.
Ways to Handle Risk
There are four basic ways to deal with risk.
1.Accept the risk, known as risk acceptance. Perry can do nothing to prevent or mitigate the impact of
a risk. For example, he continues to
Exhibit 12-1. Example of a qualitative approach.
Process Risk Control
1. Obtain involvement of
client.
Inability to make regular
contact.
Mail or e-mail duplicate
copies of project management
documentation to the client.
2. Determine requirements. Unclear requirements. Conduct periodic reviews.
Unavailable requirements. Draft requirements and review
them with client.
address the same requirements despite management having reduced the budget.
2.Adapt to the risk, known as risk adaptation. Perry can take measures that will mitigate the impact of
a risk. For example, he reduces requirements to reflect the corresponding cutback in funding.
3.Avoid the risk, known as risk avoidance. Perry takes action that will keep a risk from seriously
Title
-----------
impacting his project. For example, he decides to narrow the scope of the project to avoid certain high
risks.
4.Transfer the risk, known as risk transfer. Perry lets someone else assume the risk. For example, he
contracts out or outsources certain high-risk tasks rather than let the core team handle them.
When performing the contingency planning, Perry will identify the expected event or threat, its probability of
occurrence, and its impacts (e.g., economic, technical, operational), and then devise an appropriate response.
He uses a simple form to capture this information, as shown in Exhibit 12-2.
Perry also reviews the schedule to identify possible risks. He considers options like changing the
dependencies, durations, requirements, resource assignments, or time estimates.
Risk Reporting
Risk reporting occurs after risk identification, analysis, and control are complete. Perry has the option to
develop either a written or an oral report. In either case, however, the content of the report will be basically
the same.
A risk report should be clear, concise, and self-explanatory. It should contain categories of risks (e.g.,
business and technical); components; risks for each component, to include probability of occurrence and
impact; background and scope of project; and recommendations or actions to strengthen controls or respond
to risks when they become actual problems (e.g., contingency plans).
Exhibit 12-2. Risk response form.
Description
Probability of
Occurrence Impacts Response
Cancellation of air
transportation
Low Less attendance at
reception or wedding
Delays in arrivals
Set up charter flight
The Key: Risk Management, Not Elimination
In a dynamic environment, a project will always face risks. The key is not to try to eliminate risks but to
manage them. Perry identifies and analyzes risks. He then implements controls to mitigate or eliminate their
potential impact. However, he also communicates the list of risks and their accompanying controls to all
people who have a need to know. By developing and distributing documentation on risks and their controls,
Perry can either prevent related problems or minimize their effects when they occur.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Did you identify the major components and processes for your project?
2.Did you identify the major threats to your project? Did you identify their probability of occurrence?
3.Did you identify the controls that should exist for preventing or mitigating risks to each component
or process?
4.Did you conduct research to determine what controls actually exist?
5.For all control weaknesses, did you determine whether contingency plans should be in place? If so,
did you prepare the appropriate response?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 13
Project Documentation: Procedures, Forms, Memos,
and Such
Perry recognizes that documentation is essential for leading, defining, planning, organizing, controlling, and
closing a project. He also realizes that too much documentation is as much a problem as too little. A balance
must exist, depending largely on the size and importance of the project.
Good documentation serves as an excellent communication tool. It provides an audit trail for analysis and
project reviews. It lends order and structure to the project by giving direction and setting parameters. It
increases efficiency and effectiveness because everyone follows the same sheet of music. And it gives team
members confidence, especially when things appear chaotic or there are too many unknowns.
Project documentation consists of the following items:
Procedures
Flowcharts
Forms
Reports
Memos
Project manual
Project library
Newsletters
History files
Procedures
For many projects, particularly large ones, procedures facilitate management. They help achieve efficiency by
ensuring consistency of action. They improve effectiveness by ensuring that people achieve project goals.
Title
-----------
They reduce the learning curve by providing guidance on the way things are done. Finally, they improve
productivity because people with questions can refer to the documentation rather than interrupt other people.
Key Insights for Preparing Procedures
Developing procedures is more than just writing words on paper. Regardless of your writing ability,
consider the following when developing procedures.
1.Define acronyms the first time they appear and spell out abbreviations at first use. The reader may
not know what you mean.
2.Define special terms. The reader needs to understand what you are saying.
3.Avoid clichs. They are a tired way of expressing what you mean. Be original -- but always clear
in your meaning.
4.Check for typographical and spelling errors. They distract from the message and show sloppiness.
5.Use positive expressions. Avoid do not or cannot because such phrases create a mental block
in the readers mind. Be positive.
6.Use the active rather than the passive voice. The active voice is strong language; the passive voice
is weak and reveals a tentative writer.
7.Watch your organization. Ideas should flow logically, such as from the general to the specific, or
vice versa. Chronological order is also good.
8.Avoid wordiness. Keep sentences short (less than 15 words) and paragraphs brief (usually less
than 5 sentences). Ideas are easier to grasp this way.
9.Integrate text and graphics. If using both, ensure that the text references the graphics and that the
two match information.
10.Track your revisions. Assign a version number to each and note the date, so everyone uses the
most recent version.
To develop a good set of procedures, you need the following:
Information to write about the topic
Time to prepare, review, and publish the documents
People with good research, writing, and editing skills
Management and user buy-in to ensure people follow the procedures
Feedback loop to ensure completeness, currency, and usability
Procedures are often less than adequate on projects, for several reasons. For one, the project manager may
view writing procedures as something that must be done only to satisfy requirements. The results are poorly
written and incomplete procedures. Or the project manager may assign the task to someone who knows little
about the project or whose role is minimal. Sometimes the project manager prepares the procedures late in the
project, mainly to satisfy reviewers and auditors. Finally, the procedures are prepared and then set on a shelf,
never to be used by anyone.
Perry, of course, ensures good procedures by following four simple steps.
1.Identify the topics. Perry can either develop a set of topics on his own or solicit help from the team.
He chooses the latter, as well as conducts research on previous projects to find similar procedures.
Some specific topics include:
Change control
Forms
Meetings
Organizational structure
Purchases
Reports
Resource usage
Responsibilities
Schedules
Statusing
2.Determine the format for the procedures. There are four possible procedure formats: narrative
(Exhibit 13-1), sequential (Exhibit 13-2), playscript (Exhibit 13-3), and item-by-item (Exhibit 13-4). As
Exhibit 13-1 demonstrates, the narrative format has an essaylike appearance. Although a narrative
presentation is easy to read, information within it is often hard to find quickly. Also, it causes eyestrain,
since the blocks of text minimize white space. And it is difficult to update or revise because it lacks
modularity.
The sequential format, as shown in Exhibit 13-2, has a step-by-step appearance. Each sentence is a generally
brief command. Its brevity, abundant white space, and simplicity make it easy to follow and find information.
It is best used for procedures involving one person.
Exhibit 13-1. Narrative format.
Completing and Submitting the Monthly Status Report Form
Project:
Date:
Start (baseline):
Finish (baseline):
Management estimate at
completion (MEAC) date:
Variance:
Original total cost estimate:
Estimated cost to date:
Actual cost to date:
Management estimate at
completion (MEAC) cost:
Variance:
Overall performance evaluation:
This procedure describes how to complete and submit the Monthly Status Report (MSR) form, which is
shown above.
The MSR must be completed to track and monitor the performance of your project. It is therefore important
to complete all fields and submit the form on time.
In the project field, write the name of the project. Be sure to add the project number if one has been
assigned. In the date field, write the date you are completing the form, using the month/day/year format
(e.g., 11/26/00). In the start (baseline) field, write the original start date using the same format as the one for
the date field. Do the same for the finish (baseline) field. In the management estimate at completion
(MEAC) date field, record the actual progress to date plus the remaining estimate of the work to be
completed. In the variance field, write the difference in days between the MEAC and the original finish
date. In the total cost estimate field, write the original estimated cost for the project. . . .
1
After completing the MSR, make three copies. Keep one copy for your records. Submit one copy to your
next higher level of management or to the chairman of your steering committee, if applicable. Then attach
the remaining copy to the original and submit both to the Project Review Office (PRO) at mail stop 78H1.
One final note. The PRO must have possession of the MSR no later than the final working day of a month.
1.Authors note: This example of the narrative format would actually have been one paragraph
longer; however, we deleted the instructions for the last five fields to spare our readers.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Exhibit 13-2. Sequential format.
Monthly Status Report Form
Instructions: Complete each field according to the procedure Completing the Monthly Status Report Form,
below. Make a copy for your records and forward the original to the Program Office, mailstop 3X-41.
Project: A Date: B
Schedule:
Start Baseline: C
Finish Baseline: D
Management Estimate at Completion Date: E
Variance: F
Budget:
Original Total Cost Estimate: G
Estimated Cost to Date: H
Actual Cost to Date: I
Management Estimate at Completion: J
Variance: K
Overall Performance Evaluation: L
Completing the Monthly Status Report Form
This procedure describes how to complete the Monthly Status Report form.
1.Obtain a copy of the form from the project office.
2.Answer each field on the form by matching the applicable letter below with the corresponding one
shown in the figure on the next page.
A.Name of the project
B.Date you completed the form
Title
-----------
C.The original start date in month/day/year format
D.The original finish date in month/day/year format
E.The date reflecting actual progress-to-date plus the remaining estimate of the work to be
completed in month/day/year format
F.The difference in days between the management estimate at completion and the original
finish date
G.The original estimated cost for the project
H.The original estimated cost up to a specific date
I.The costs accrued up to a specific date
J.The actual costs accrued up to a specific date plus the remaining estimated costs to complete
the project
K.The original total estimated cost minus management at completion cost
L.Your opinion about the overall progress of the project as well as a description of the major
cost, budget, requirements, and technical issues impacting the project
Exhibit 13-3. Playscript format.
Processing the Monthly Status Report Form
The procedure describes how to process the Monthly Status Report Form. It does not explain how to
complete it. For that, refer to the procedure Completing the Monthly Status Report Form.
PROJECT MANAGER
1.Obtain a copy of the Monthly Status Report Form.
2.Complete the Monthly Status Report Form.
3.Date and sign the form.
4.Make two (2) photocopies.
a.Retain one copy for the project history file.
b.Attach the other copy to the master document.
PROGRAM OFFICE
1.Review the Monthly Status Report Form for completeness.
2.If incomplete:
a.Prepare a memo noting the shortcomings.
b.Attach a copy of the memo to the master document.
c.File the copy.
d.Return the memo and master copy to the project manager.
3.If complete:
a.Date-stamp the master document and photocopy.
b.File the master copy.
c.Return the copy to the project manager.
As with the sequential format, the playscript format (Exhibit 13-3) has a step-by-step appearance and
possesses the same structure. Similarly, its brief style, abundant white space, and simplicity make it easy to
follow and to find information. It is best used for procedures involving two or more people.
The item-by-item format, shown in Exhibit 13-4, has all the characteristics and advantages of the sequential
and playscript formats. It works best, however, when a procedure covers a mixture of topics.
3.Prepare, review, revise, and publish the procedure. This step should involve as much
participation as possible by members of the team, so as to seek buy-in from those who must follow the
procedures. Here is an outline of a typical procedure:
I.Purpose
II.Scope
III.Contents
IV.Approvals
V.Appendices
Exhibit 13-4. Item-by-item format.
Handling All Reports for Competitive-Sensitive Projects
This procedure describes how to handle reports generated for projects designated proprietary.
I.Cost Report
A.Review the report.
B.Store one copy of the report in a secure room, drawer, or safe.
C.Shred any additional copies.
II.Schedule Report
A.Review the report.
B.Store one copy of the report in a secure room, drawer, or safe.
C.Shred any additional copies.
III.Monthly Status Report
A.Complete the report.
B.Upon receiving the date-stamped copy from the program office, shred the original.
C.Store the retained copy in a secure room, drawer, or safe.
4.Follow the procedures. At first the comment might sound academic; however, many projects have
written procedures, let alone plans, that no one follows. In the end, the procedures serve no function
other than to occupy a bare spot on a shelf.
Flowcharts
Many times, pictures and diagrams are preferred over text or are treated as supplements to text. Flowcharts
indeed are worth a thousand words.
Flowcharts are easier to understand than written procedures and communicate more with less. However, even
using flowcharts requires effort. It takes time to prepare them. They must be updated to maintain relevancy.
And users and management must buy in to them if the project manager expects people to follow them.
When developing flowcharts, keep the following points in mind.
1.Use symbols consistently. Provide a key to the symbols.
2.Put the flowcharts under version control. Different versions can quickly be released, thereby
confusing people.
3.Use a software toot to generate the diagrams. Revisions will be easier and the charts clearer.
4.Keep it simple. Avoid putting too much on a page. A cluttered page can be as mentally taxing as
large blocks of small text on a page.
There are a number of flowcharting techniques. Some charts show the flow of control (e.g., do step 1, then
step 2, and, if positive, do step 3). Others show the flow of data (e.g., the use of early and late dates and
durations to calculate float). Exhibits 13-5 and 13-6 have flowcharts showing flow of control and data flow,
respectively.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


When flowcharting, follow these four steps:
1.Determine the topic, just as you would with written procedures.
2.Determine the type of diagram and whether it is a substitute or a complement to a procedure. Flow
of control is the most popular, followed by data flow diagrams.
3.Prepare, review, revise, and publish the flowchart. This step is the same for procedures.
4.Follow the flowchart. Like procedures, they can quickly end up covering a bare spot on a bookshelf.
Forms
Although many people dislike completing forms, Perry sees their value in managing his project. Forms
capture and communicate information. They also provide audit trails to help learn from past experience,
compile statistics, and conduct postimplementation reviews.
Unfortunately, many forms are not user-friendly. The instructions for completion and distribution are unclear.
The fields do not flow logically. They ask for way too much information. And there are usually too many
forms of too many varieties.
Ideally, forms should have these qualities:
Be logically organized
Be readily available
Not exceed one page
List a source and destination
Have clear and concise instructions for completion and submission
Have adequate space for filling in information
Request only the necessary information
For use in project management, forms can capture information on such topics as activity descriptions, Activity
estimating, assignments, change management, estimated labor usage, labor and nonlabor costs, problem
identification and tracking, and status of activities.
Title
-----------
Exhibit 13-5.Flow of control.
Exhibit 13-6.Data flow.
Here are some guidelines on how to prepare a usable form:
1.Determine its purpose (e.g., capturing schedule or cost data).
2.Determine who will complete the form and who will process it.
3.Identify the exact data to capture.
4.Determine its source and destination.
5.Prepare the instructions for its completion.
6.Prepare a draft of the form (e.g., using a graphics or spreadsheet program).
7.Circulate the form for evaluation (e.g., to people who can complete it and to others who will use
data that it captures).
8.Make revisions, if necessary.
9.Determine the number of copies and how the copies will be made.
10.Reproduce the form.
11.Distribute it either electronically or in hard copy.
Exhibit 13-7 is an example of a well-defined form.
Perry performs four steps to draw up forms for his project.
Distribution Methods
There are essentially two ways to present forms, reports, memos, and the like.
Hard copy. Traditional papers, usually typed or printed. It has the advantage of being familiar; the
downside is that it can be costly to maintain, labor-intensive to revise, difficult to keep current, highly
prone to human error, and takes up file space.
Electronic copy. On computer disk or tape. Electronic copies can reduce the need for storage
space, lower labor-intensive actions (e.g., revisions), and make updating easier. Unfortunately,
electronic copies still remain susceptible to human error, although less so with the recent advances in
electronic storage. Hard copy backups have been the norm, here.
Electronic storage has its challenges, too. It requires investing in and maintaining a technology
infrastructure (e.g., local area network or Web site), training people to use the technology, and dealing with
administrative issues such as disaster recovery and backup.
1.Determine the topics requiring forms. These are topics for which he will need information
throughout the project.
2.Design the forms. As with procedures and flowcharts, Perry will obtain input from the major
participants. This action increases peoples buy-in and their willingness to use the forms. When
designing the forms, he also chooses an open layout that is easy to use.
3.Distribute a first draft of the forms. Perry gives everyone involved a chance to revise the forms and
sharpen their design.
4.Perry prepares the forms in their final form, for either electronic use or as printed hard copies. Each
form includes instructions on submitting the completed form and also handling changes to the form at a
later date.
Reports
The right amount of feedback can make the difference between the success and failure of a project. Reports
are vehicles for giving reliable feedback.
Reports communicate information. They help project managers monitor and track individual and overall
performance, indicating when to take corrective action. And they give feedback to everyone involved about
their contributions to the project.
Exhibit 13-7. Overall performance evaluation.
Monthly Status Report Form
Instructions: Complete each field according to the procedure "Completing the Monthly Status Report
Form." Make one copy for your records and forward the original to the Program Office, Mailstop 3X-41.
Project Name: Date:
Schedule:
Start date (baseline):
Finish date (baseline):
Management Estimate at Completion Date:
Variance:
Budget:
Original Total Cost Estimate:
Estimated Cost to Date:
Actual Cost to Date:
Management Estimate at Completion Cost:
Variance:
Overall Performance Evaluation:
For reports to offer these advantages, however, they must have certain characteristics. They must:
Be easily understood
Be produced and available in a timely manner
Have timely, meaningful information
Not be too numerous
To use reports on his project, Perry performs the following seven steps:
1.He identifies the topics. Will he need reports on the schedule? Costs? Quality? Typical reports are
activity relationship reports, bar charts, cost reports, histograms, network diagrams, problem reports,
project status reports, and resource usage reports.
2.For each report, Perry determines information requirements and the means to collect it. He reviews
the statement of work for reporting requirements, determines the readership for each report, and
interviews recipients to determine their informational needs.
3.He lays out the report, keeping in mind clarity, logic, and relevancy. He remembers to keep the
report simple and focuses on obtaining the information thats needed.
4.He determines the frequency of generation. Weekly? Biweekly? Monthly? Ad hoc?
5.He distributes the reports. Often, he will generate these reports via a software package on a personal
computer to give him the ability to experiment with communications modes.
6.He obtains feedback. Sometimes the reports will not contain enough information; other times, they
might have too much and be distracting. Because generating reports takes time and effort, he wants to
minimize frustration by keeping the reports helpful and concise.
7.He stores a copy of each report, in case he needs an audit trail or to develop lessons learned in the
project.
Memos
Many people hate to write memos. Thats unfortunate, because a well-written memo can have tremendous
impact on coworkers.
A memo provides a record of results. It encourages commitment to an idea or cause. It offers traceability. It
raises issues and helps resolve them. Above all, memos are excellent tools for communicating with other
people.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


To fulfill these purposes, however, memos must be clear, concise, direct, legible, and organized. Exhibit 13-8
is an example of a well-written memo.
Perry will always prepare a memo to clarify a policy or subject, document the results of a meeting, raise an
issue and get it resolved, record an accident, or schedule events. Thus, a memo should contain a date,
addressee, subject, message statement, giving the who, what, when, where, and why of a subject, information
on a response if desired, and signature. Memos can be prepared and sent electronically or via hard copy.
Newsletters
Not every project is big enough to warrant its own newsletter. For large projects, however, a newsletter can be
invaluable.
A newsletter can enhance communications, informing everyone of important happenings and giving new
information. It provides the project manager with the opportunity to get the word out, especially about
matters that directly affect project performance. It also serves as a record of significant activities and
accomplishments. Finally, it answers questions and dispels rumors before they arise.
Exhibit 13-8. Example of a well-written memo.
Date: February 28, 19XX
To: Gina Davies 713-1
Cynthia Fralusinski 714-2
Raymond Leazowitz 713-2
David Rockford 713-3
Vy Toon 714-3
Hank Wilson 715-1
Henry Winkless 716-8
cc: Eva Brewster 716-7
Larry Eisenberg 715-4
Subject: Planning Meeting for Bridal Shower
Title
-----------
On March 10, we will hold a planning session for the Smythe bridal shower in the Rainbow Conference
Room on the second floor of the Corporate Headquarters Building.
Prior to the meeting, prepare and bring a list of action items to share with the group.
If you have any questions or comments, please feel free to contact me at extension 4127.
Perry
Project Manager, Smythe Wedding
Mailstop 713-4
There are, however, several issues related to publishing a newsletter. For example, the newsletter can become
a political rather than a communications tool, serving merely to pacify political sensitivities. It is
time-consuming and labor intensive to develop. Writing, proofreading, printing, and distributing a newsletter,
whether in hard copy or electronic form, is no easy task. It requires, too, people who can write and edit,
talents that are not too common apparently.
A newsletter can cover many topics, including team successes, challenges, biographies of participants, and
new techniques developed. The key to keeping a newsletter active is to encourage team members, and the
internal customer, to submit articles for the publication. That encourages people to read it and feel it is not a
propaganda rag.
History files
During the fog of managing a project, important documentation can be lost or misplaced. To ensure that does
not happen, Perry sets up project history files.
These files can be a drawer in a filing cabinet or a directory on a personal computer or file server. In any
form, they provide the ability to reconstruct situations for an audit trail, review problems, and satisfy audit
requirements. They help reduce the learning curve of new team members, as they review titles to become
familiar with critical issues and they provide background information for further work.
Project history files frequently contain: bar charts of schedules, drafts of documents, work estimates,
completed forms, memorandums, minutes of meetings, network diagrams, procedures, reports, responsibility
matrices, statements of work, and work breakdown structures.
Perry must keep the files up to date, from the start to the end of the project. Thats why he establishes them as
early as posible. He also establishes a procedure for removing and tracking files to avoid losing or misplacing
documentation. For example, he might provide a check-in/checkout sheet that people sign when removing and
returning a file. He designates an area where everyone can access the files. (Often, by accident, project
managers lock the files in their drawers or do not store them on the file server, thereby making accessibility
difficult.) Finally, he assigns someone to maintain the files.
Perry performs four basic steps to set up project history files:
1.He identifies their contents, e.g., as being only recent sets of schedules, or all previous versions.
2.He determines their organization, e.g., by topic or date.
3.He controls their removal, e.g., by means of a check-in/check-out sheet.
4.He makes their location obvious and provides the information needed to access them, e.g., by
writing an announcement and distributing it via newsletter or e-mail.
Project Manual
It is often handy to have certain information readily available, such as phone numbers and task listings. Perry
knows that a project manual can be that reference. It is an essential reference book for project management.
The project manual, however, does more than provide its readers with useful information. It is also a
communication tool, enabling people to interact efficiently and effectively.
Exhibit 13-9 is the table of contents for the Smythe Project manual. Of course, there is no restriction on
content other than being useful, relevant, and readable.
Ideally, the manual should be prepared early on and be maintained throughout the project cycle. Everyone
should have ready access to it, either in hard copy or electronic form.
To compile the project manual, Perry performs these six steps.
1.He determines the contents, e.g., by interviewing team members or reviewing the statement of work.
2.He organizes the contents, e.g., arranging them by topic or phase.
3.He determines the number of copies, e.g., by using the size of the team as the basis.
4.He assigns responsibility for maintaining the manual, e.g., to someone working on a noncritical task.
5.He publishes and distributes the manuals, e.g., electronically or as hard copy.
6.He seeks feedback from the users of the manual, e.g., by providing tear sheets on which they can
submit suggestions.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


The Project Library
The project library, like the history files, stores information. The major difference is that the library contains
more than project management information. The project library also stores company and project-specific
policies and procedures, history files, newsletters, journal publications, and related books, and technical
documentation.
As he did to set up the history files, Perry follows these steps to set up the library:
1.He identifies the contents, e.g., by interviewing team members for their suggestions.
2.He determines the organization, e.g., arranging documents by title, code, or author.
3.He controls the removal of documents, e.g., by providing a check-in/check-out sheet.
4.He determines the location of the library, e.g., providing a readily accessible site; he also determines
the procedures for accessing material.
Determining the Paper Trails Length
Too much or too little documentation can negatively affect a project. Perry recognizes that the key is to have
the right amount of documentation to satisfy the right needs. He knows that the content of documents should
be current, clear, concise, and organized to be useful to team members. He ensures, too, that the
documentation is accessible to everyone, such as through a project manual or library.
Exhibit 13-9. Table of contents for the Smythe Project manual.
Title
-----------
Table of Contents
I.INTRODUCTORY SEGMENT
A.Purpose of the manual
B.How to use the manual
C.Who to contact for revisions
II.PROJECT BACKGROUND INFORMATION
A.Statement of work
B.Project declaration
III.RESPONSIBILITIES
A.Organization chart
B.Job descriptions and responsibilities
IV.POLICIES, PROCEDURES, AND WORKFLOWS
Copies relating to these topics:
1.People
2.Scheduling
3.Qualities
4.Costs
5.Other
V.FORMS
Copies relating to these topics:
1.People
2.Scheduling
3.Qualities
4.Costs
5.Other
VI.REPORTS
Samples relating to these topics:
1.People
2.Scheduling
3.Qualities
4.Costs
5.Other
VII.REFERENCE LISTINGS
A.Phone listings
B.Functional priorities
C.Documentation matrix
D.Other
VIII.OTHER ADMINISTRATIVE TOPICS
IX.APPENDICES
Questions for Getting Started
1.If developing procedures, did you:
Identify the topics?
Determine the types of procedures needed?
Receive reviews by all relevant people?
Distribute the procedures?
Document the procedures?
Place the procedures under configuration control?
Seek feedback?
2.If developing flowcharts, did you:
Identify the topics?
Determine the types of diagrams to use?
Issue standard templates?
Determine whether the flowchart will supplement or replace a procedure?
Distribute the flowchart?
Seek feedback?
3.If developing forms, did you:
Determine what forms you need?
Design each form according to the characteristics described in this chapter?
Determine how people can obtain a copy of the form?
Determine how and where people can submit a completed form?
Institute a way for people to provide feedback on the forms?
4.If developing reports, did you:
Determine the necessary types of reports to use?
Design each report according to the characteristics described in this chapter?
Inform everyone who need to receive the reports?
Develop a distribution list?
Determine the frequency of generation for each report?
Determine where to store the reports?
Seek feedback from users?
5.If you need to prepare a memo, did you:
include a date, subject title, address, signature block, and purpose statement?
Answer the who, what, when, where, and why questions?
Check for clarity, conciseness, directives, legibility, and structure?
6.If you decide to publish a newsletter, did you determine: Who will prepare the newsletter?
The frequency of the publication?
Who must review it prior to each publication?
The topics?
The layout?
The method of distribution?
7.If you decide to have a project manual, did you:
Determine the method for keeping the manual -- that is, hard copy, electronic copy, Web site?
Determine the contents?
Develop a structure, reflected in the form of a table of contents?
Determine the number of copies?
Select the mode of binding?
Assign responsibilities for keeping the manual current?
Set up a format for reviewing the contents?
Seek feedback?
8.If you elected to set up project history files, did you:
Determine the contents?
Determine the organizational structure?
Assign responsibility for maintaining them?
Establish a procedure for accessing, removing and replacing them?
Communicate their location and procedure for accessing, removing, and returning them?
9.If you decide to set up a project library, did you:
Determine the contents?
Determine the filing system?
Assign responsibility for maintaining it?
Establish a procedure for accessing, removing, and replacing material?
Communicate the location and procedure for accessing, removing, and returning material?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 14
Team Dynamics and Successful Interactions
The organization functions of the project managers job extend well beyond developing the team, allocating
resources, estimating costs, and providing documentation. The project manager also needs to set up the
elements for facilitating team dynamicsin other words, making it all work. This includes setting up a
project office, holding regular meetings, making presentations, and using people skills to encourage team
members to reach the project goal.
Set Up the Project Office
Since his project is comparatively large and has high visibility, Perry sets up a project office. Despite
employing a Web site and other computer technologies for communications, hell need a central location to
manage the efforts.
Perrys ideal office has telephones, fax, and other communications equipment, as well as storage space for
hard-copy forms, the history files, and the project library. Since the project office will also be a meeting place
for team members, it has cubicles for working and conference rooms to hold meetings, training sessions, and
other project-related activities. There is equipment such as easel stands, overhead projector with extra bulbs,
screen, whiteboards, and tables with a sufficient number of chairs. In addition, the project office has tape,
writing instruments, paper, viewfoils, sticky notes, paper clips, easel pads, and the like.
While this all sounds like common sense, the reality is that many projects, even those with a project office,
lack such simple resources. Some advance planning in this regard can make managing the project much
smoother.
Often overlooked, too, is the realization that the project office is a communications center. It is like a
computer network control center where all information flows in and out. In this communications center is a
very important tool, called a visibility wall or visibility room. This wall or room is where all project
documentation is showcased. Perry puts on the walls of his visibility room his bar charts, maps, minutes of
key meetings, network diagrams, organization charts, photographs (e.g., recognition awards), process flows,
responsibility matrices, statements of work, technical drawings, and work breakdown structures. Essentially,
Title
-----------
what goes on the walls depends on what Perry deems important for everyone to see.
When setting up a visibility room, Perry remembers the following points.
1.Plan in advance. On a sheet of paper, Perry draws a picture of what goes on which wall. This
prevents rework and reduces costs, especially if he is using high-quality graphics.
2.Keep the walls current. This way people have a reason to review the walls. The walls serve no
purpose if no one looks at them.
3.Use the walls. Perry will hold meetings in the room and refer to the items posted; his actions enforce
the importance of the information on the walls.
Conduct Meetings
There will be meetings frequently, and they will consume a large percentage of everyones time. These
meetings are usually one of three basic types: checkpoint reviews, status reviews, and staff meetings. In
addition, there are occasional ad hoc meetings.
The checkpoint review is held at specific points in time, usually after a red-letter day or significant event (e.g.,
completion of a major milestone). Its purpose is to determine what has been done and decide whether to
proceed or cancel the project. Exhibit 14-1 is an agenda from one of Perrys checkpoint reviews.
The purpose of the status review is to collect information to determine progress in satisfying cost, schedule,
and quality criteria. The status review is held regularly (e.g., weekly or biweekly). Exhibit 14-2 is an agenda
from one of Perrys status reviews.
Like the status review, the staff meeting is held regularly. All team members receive information from the
project manager and share additional data and insights. Exhibit 14-3 is an agenda from one of Perrys staff
meetings.
The ad hoc meeting is held irregularly, often spontaneously by team members. The idea is to resolve an issue
or communicate information. Exhibit 14-4 is an agenda from one of the Smythe Projects many ad hoc
meetings.
Whether conducting a staff meeting, status review, checkpoint review, or ad hoc meeting, Perry applies five
rules to ensure efficient and effective meetings.
Exhibit 14-1. Checkpoint review agenda.
Agenda
April 7, 19XX
I.Background
A.Previous red-letter events/milestones
B.Challenge in the past
II.Lessons regarding this event
A.Achievements/successes
B.Problems and challenges
C.Remaining issues
III.Decision whether to proceed as is, differently, or halt
IV.Remaining issues
V.Open forum
Exhibit 14-2. Status review agenda.
Agenda
February 28, 19XX
1.Input to status regarding:
A.Schedule
B.Budget
C.Quality
II.Issues and concerns regarding:
A.Schedule
B.Budget
C.Quality
D.Other
III.Open forum
IV.Next meeting
Exhibit 14-3. Staff meeting agenda.
Agenda
March 3, 19XX
I.Information
A.Announcements
B.Issues of concern
Schedule
Quality
Budget
Other
C.Recognition
D.Upcoming issues and events
E.Open Forum
F.Next Meeting
1.Prepare an agenda. He will follow an agenda like the ones in Exhibits 14-1 through 14-4. An agenda
is a logical listing of topics to cover. It keeps the meeting focused and ensures that it is productive.
2.Announce the meeting. He notifies attendees about the meeting in advance. Even if it is an ad hoc
meeting, he informs people about the purpose of the meeting.
3.Be prepared. He comes with the right supplies, equipment, and copies of documents to distribute.
This way theres no last-minute searches for equipment or extra copies.
4.Encourage participation. He gives everyone the opportunity to contribute, but avoids letting anyone
dominate the meeting. He makes sure the meeting doesnt become a platform for someones
pontification, including himself.
5.Take notes and distribute the minutes afterwards. By taking notes and converting them into minutes,
he communicates the importance of the meeting and increases the likelihood of people honoring their
commitments.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Give Effective Presentations
Perry and his team will be giving presentations, either among themselves, to senior management, or to the
customer. These presentations require more than standing in front of people and talking. They involve
communicating.
Exhibit 14-4. Ad hoc meeting agenda.
Agenda
June 11, 19XX
I.Description of situation or problem
A.Previous red-letter events/milestones
II.Background details
A.Who
B.What
C.When
D.Where
E.Why
F.How
III.Alternative courses of action
IV.Select appropriate course of action
V.Plan to implement course of action
A.Who
B.What
C.When
D.Where
E.Why
F.How
Title
-----------
VI.Follow-up meeting
Perry will likely have to give three fundamental types of presentations. The first is a presentation to persuade.
He will, for example, probably have to convince senior management to provide more resources. The second
type of presentation is to inform. He will probably have to communicate information, for example, to senior
managers about cost and schedule performance. And the third type is to explain. For example, he might have
to instruct people on project management tools and techniques.
Of course, team members will likely have to give the same types of presentations. Whether you are a project
manager or team member, as a presenter you must follow six fundamental steps:
1.Know yourself and the audience. Find out about the audience to ascertain your commonalities and
differences. You can get useful information, for example, by interviewing people who know audience
members. Follow up by making a list of what you share and dont share with the audience. This
knowledge will prove useful in preparing the presentation.
2.Perceive your audience and how it perceives you. Look at ways to influence the audience to see you
in a favorable light. This will make it easier to communicate your message. You can win the audience
over, for example, by expressing values or experiences you share with its members.
3.Determine the type and structure of the presentation. Answer all the who, what, when, where, and
why questions pertaining to your topic. Determine if your presentation is meant to inform, persuade, or
explain. Then formulate your overall strategy to achieve the goal of your presentation, and your tactics
for executing that strategy.
4.Develop the material. Build your presentation. Determine the content and logically arrange it. For
example, you can arrange topics chronologically or by level of importance. Also incorporate visual
aids, statistics, and other materials.
5.Rehearse. Practice as if you were actually giving the presentationdo a dry run. Try to improve
your delivery. This is also the time to become familiar with the location for the presentationroom
size, lighting, sound equipment, and so on. Rehearse there, if you can.
6.Deliver the presentation. You have polished your delivery, eliminated any poorly designed visual
aids and distracting mannerisms (e.g., pacing about with your hands in your pockets or playing with
pocket change). You should encourage and be prepared to answer questions. You might elicit questions
from a reluctant audience by asking a question yourself.
Apply Interpersonal Skills
Interpersonal skills, also called people skills, play an integral part in the success of every project. Whatever
gets accomplished is done by people and their interactions, so interpersonal skills can seriously impact results.
Interpersonal relations embrace three primary skills: being an active listener, reading people, and dealing with
conflicts effectively.
Being an Active Listener
One of the best communication tools a project manager can have is active listening. It means listening
genuinely to what the speaker is sayingin short, focusing on what is said and how it is said.
Active listeners:
Avoid interrupting the person except to clarify a point.
Give listening cues (e.g., nod the head or use an expression) to indicate involvement in the
conversation.
Are not preoccupied with something else during the conversation (e.g., working on documentation
while the other person talks).
Do not change the topic abruptly during the conversation.
Do not daydream while the other person talks.
Pay as much attention to body language as to the oral message.
Remove all distractions (e.g., radio playing in the background).
The key is to be active, not passive, by becoming fully engaged in what is being said.
Reading People
It would be nice to know the true motives of people; however, that is impossible, since many people are not
open and honest. Project managers, therefore, must identify the real issues and motivations of people.
Fortunately, there are tools to help project managers understand the motivations of people. Unfortunately,
these tools do not always work, owing to the vagaries of human nature. Still, many project managers find
them useful.
One tool is the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator for personality preferences. This identifies personality types
based on a combination of four preferences: extrovert (outward) versus introvert (inward), sensing (actual)
versus intuitive (sixth sense), thinking (structuring information) versus feeling (personal), and judging
(organized) versus perceiving (spontaneous). These categories are useful, but require a good understanding of
the preferences.
This approach does not specify which personality is better or worse or which one is good or bad. It states only
that people have a preference that is reflected in the way they deal with reality, their environment, and their
relationships. An excellent resource for using this indicator is Please Understand Me: Character and
Temperament Types, by David Keirsey and Marilyn Bates.
Another popular tool is Abraham Maslows hierarchy of needs, described in Chapter 4. This model is easier
to use, since it identifies peoples needs according to hierarchical order: physiological (food), safety (shelter),
social (acceptance), esteem (sense of importance), and self-actualization (becoming). The satisfaction, or lack
of earlier needs, dictates the motivations of people.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Another popular, though less widespread, personality tool is Robert
Transactional Analysis
Transactional analysis, or TA, describes how people interact with each other via ego states. An ego state is a
combination of feelings and experiences that manifest themselves in the way people consistently behave.
Essentially, behavior reflects ones feelings and experiences.
TA posits three ego states: parent, child, and adult.
The parent ego state reflects parental feelings and experiences, like being critical and directive.
The adult ego state reflects being realistic and objective when dealing with people.
The child ego state reflects childlike behavior, like trying to please, uncontrollable laughter, or
rebelliousness.
The interaction between two people reflects a transaction. There are several types of transactions between
people, with some being parent-to-parent, parent-to-child, and parent-to-adult. Such transactions can be
detected through body language and verbally.
An excellent book on TA is Born to Win: Transactional Analysis with Gestalt Experiments, by Muriel
James and Dorothy Jongeward (Reading, Mass.: Addison Wesley, 1987).
Boltons social style matrix. Bolton divides social styles and personal expectations into two dimensions:
assertiveness and responsiveness. Assertiveness is the energy or effort individuals invest in influencing others.
Responsiveness is the energy or effort individuals invest in controlling their emotions when dealing with other
people. The combination of assertiveness and responsiveness creates social stereotypes: analytical (logical),
driver (determined), amiable (diplomatic), and expressive (spontaneous). Boltons topology does not say
which social style is better or worse, or which one is good or bad. It simply states that people have to deal
with life in general and social environments in particular. For more information, see Social Style/Management
Style by Robert and Dorothy Bolton.
There are, of course, a plethora of theories about people and how to understand them, from Sigmund Freud
and Carl Jung to B. F. Skinner and Frederick Herzberg. The key is to find a model or tool that works best for
you, then apply it in your own circumstances.
Title
-----------
An interesting and often reliable side concept about people is their body language. According to motivational
experts, our body language reveals more about us than what we say. Some experts estimate that body
language makes up 70 to 90 percent of a conversation. This means you need to pay attention to facial
expressions, body movements, posture, and eye movements. A mastery of the art of reading body language
can help the project manager discern whether people are truly committed to the project or providing honest
status information.
There are two caveats about relying on body language. The first is to look at body language in totalitythat
is, avoid relying on one body movement alone. The other is that cultural differences can mislead in the
interpretation of true motivations. In some cultures, for instance, it is acceptable behavior to stand closer
together or to maintain eye contact while in others it is not. A misinterpretation can result in real problems.
Perry keeps this thought in mind, since the Smythe wedding will occur in Italy; body language in Italy can
have entirely different meanings from that in the United States.
Deal With Conflict Effectively
Conflict is a way of life and it can surface anytime during the project cycle. Conflict can arise over sharing
people, equipment, supplies, or money; over goals and specifications; between personalities; over differences
of opinion; and even over power.
The potential for conflict is highest, however, at the beginning, when a project manager competes for
resources or when difficulties arise over contractual requirements. And conflict at the beginning can lead to
even more difficulties later if it is not addressed properly. The potential for conflict is high, too, at the end of
the cycle, when participants face schedule pressures. Conflict in and of itself is not bad. It can alert project
managers to problems that must be addressed. The challenge is to manage the conflict in a manner that leads
to project success rather than failure.
Project managers, like all people, deal with conflict differently. Some project managers avoid it, letting it
smolder. Some project managers give up every time a conflict surfaces. Other project managers deny that
conflict exists at all. And some masterfully blame others. These are all defense mechanisms. Nevertheless,
they do not deal with the conflict. All these mechanisms manage to do is avoid conflict or push it into the
background.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


The question, then, is how to deal with conflict constructively. Since it really centers on people, it makes
sense to view conflict as primarily a people issue. Perry takes several actions to respond to conflict.
1.He diffuses the charged emotion within himself. If he has to, he will do something as simple as
count to ten before doing anything.
2.He diffuses the charged emotions in other people. He will calm down people by calling for a
cooling-off period, especially when emotions run high.
3.He identifies the facts of the situation to determine the cause of the conflict. He avoids comments
that can be viewed as taking sides or being accusational.
4.He applies active listening. He listens for the facts to acquire an objective assessment of the
situation. Active listening helps to avoid being pulled into the conflict.
5.He acknowledges any anger that may be present, while focusing on the merits of the conflict. If
anger is justified, he acknowledges it.
6.He keeps everyone focused on the cause of the conflict. He avoids the tendency to blame someone
or to rationalize it away.
7.He keeps the big picture in focus. He asks himself what the best way is to resolve the conflict so as
to achieve the project goal.
8.He sets a plan for resolving the conflict. He also remains objective.
9.He seeks participation in the resolution. Unless an impasse occurs, he lets the people decide on a
mutually agreeable solution. That builds bridges and commitment to the solution.
10.He encourages a win-win solution, not a win-lose or lose-lose. With a win-win solution, emotions
will subside and there will be little or no room for bitterness.
Title
-----------
Handling Difficult People
Project managers work under pressure, with little formal authority over people. Dealing with difficult people
under such circumstances just adds stress as they try to bring their projects in on time and within budget.
If that were not enough, project managers must deal with different types of difficult people. In his superb
book Coping with Difficult People (New York: Dell Publishing, 1981), Dr. Robert Bramson identifies what
he calls the hostile aggressive, com-pleat complainer, clam, super-agreeable, negativist, bulldozer, balloon,
and staller.
In the project environment, all these categories of difficult people are present.
The hostile aggressive, for example, likes to shoot holes in any schedule proposal. The super-agreeable
agrees to perform a task by a certain date but changes his mind based on who he talked with last. The staller
is the customer who is required to make a decision and takes forever, causing the project to be delayed.
Getting Teamwork to Work
How people on a team interact can influence the results of a project. Setting up an adequate project office
contributes to effective teamwork in any project-oriented team. In addition, good communication and
interpersonal skills, and effective use of conflict management techniques can go a long way toward producing
positive results for a project. Perry realizes, however, that the responsibility lies with everyone to exercise
positive team dynamics throughout the life of the project.
Questions for Getting Started
1.If setting up a project office, did you:
Develop a layout?
Determine the contents?
Determine the location?
Determine who will work there?
Determine the necessary equipment and supplies?
2.If setting up a visibility wall or room, did you:
Develop a layout?
Determine the contents?
Determine its purpose?
3.If holding checkpoint review meetings, did you:
Decide to have agendas?
Determine the locations?
Determine how to notify attendees?
Decide to have minutes taken?
Determine the necessary equipment and supplies?
Make an effort to get everyones participation?
Determine length of the meetings?
4.If holding status review meetings, did you:
Decide to have agendas?
Determine the locations?
Determine how to notify attendees?
Decide to have minutes taken?
Determine the necessary equipment and supplies?
Make an effort to get everyones participation?
Determine length of the meetings?
5.If holding staff meetings, did you:
Decide to have agendas?
Determine the locations?
Determine how to notify attendees?
Decide to have minutes taken?
Determine the necessary equipment and supplies?
Make an effort to get everyones participation?
Determine length of the meetings?
6.If holding ad hoc meetings, did you:
Decide to have agendas?
Determine the locations?
Determine how to notify attendees?
Decide to have minutes taken?
Determine the necessary equipment and supplies?
Make an effort to get everyones participation?
Determine length of the meetings?
7.If giving presentations, did you:
Determine the types to give?
Determine your audience?
Recognize the key perceptions?
Prepare the logical structure?
Develop clean, meaningful material?
Rehearse?
Give a successful delivery?
8.Are you an active listener?
9.Can you read people? Do you need a way to do that? What is that way?
10.How well do you deal with conflict? What approach do you take to deal with it? On an individual
basis? On a team basis?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 15
Performance Assessment: Tracking and Monitoring
With a solid project definition, plan, and organizational infrastructure, Perry is confident that he can control
his project. He is not nave enough, however, to think that he can sit back and remain idle. Quite the contrary,
he knows all about Murphys law. He knows from the physicists view of the universe that entropy can occur.
So he respondsnot reactsto changing circumstances. He does that best by tracking and monitoring
performance. And the keys to tracking and monitoring performance are status data and status assessments.
Collect Status Data
Status data offer several advantages for Perry. From the data he can determine project performance
specifically, how well the goals of the project are being met. He can also determine how efficiently work is
being done. He can reduce his and everyone elses frustration and anxiety by providing feedback. It instills
confidence in everyone that the project is under control, that the project manager is monitoring its pulse.
Finally, he can maintain communications and information sharing among the participants.
Unfortunately, status data are often not collected well. The task can be labor intensive and time-consuming.
This is especially the case when there is no previous infrastructure in place or when the team members lack
experience. If the project manager, or the team, lacks the expertise or knowledge of collection, there may be
an inappropriate assessment. Also, the project team may be using incompatible computing tools and
converting the data requires considerable effort and expertise. Teams using older software and hardware
particularly find this situation complicates data collection.
The style of the project manager can affect data collection. If she prefers to shoot from the hip or rely less
on administration, the project manager will likely rely more on intuition and informal methods for data
collection. Though theres some merit under certain circumstances, this can result in gross misjudgments.
Likewise, the project manager may not have a good grasp of the projects scope. Failure to understand the
scope can result in problems determining what data are needed.
Perry, fortunately, is not one of these project managers. He understands the importance of reliable data. He
Title
-----------
must have certain prerequisites in place to do meaningful assessments.
A solid information infrastructure. He sets up a process for identifying, collecting, and compiling
data that will be reliable and valid.
Available expertise. He assigns responsibility for collecting data to someone who has a good
understanding of data collection techniques.
A standardized set of tools to collect and compile the data. He knows that a mixture of incompatible
hardware and software will cause frustration levels to rise and nobody, not even himself, will bother to
collect data.
Clear value in collecting data. If people do not see the value of data collection, they will be reluctant
to expend the effort. Collecting data must be meaningful on both individual and group levels. This
distinction is important, since it affects how the data will eventually be formatted and reported.
Methods of Collection
Perry uses formal and informal modes for collecting data. Formal modes include status reviews, one-on-one
sessions, and forms.
The status review, discussed in Chapter 13, is held regularly. The meeting covers cost, schedule, and quality
measures. Perry collects data prior to the status review, so that at the meeting he can discuss the current status,
make an assessment, and determine corrective actions. With proper technology, he could, at the meeting, enter
the data into a computer, generate the necessary reports, assess the program, and decide an appropriate action
to take.
There are problems with collecting data at status review meetings. For example, sometimes the meetings can
skew results. Peer pressure can directly or indirectly force people to fudge the data in order to paint an
optimistic or pessimistic picture. It is also important to remember that while collecting status data, the project
manager remain objective and not influence the reports. The project manager must hear what he needs to hear
and not what he wants to hear. Biased data lead to biased assessments.
One-on-one sessions work best for collecting data just prior to a status review. The project manager or her
representatives meet with each person individually to collect status data.
But as the number of team members increases, so does the time needed to collect data and, as time passes by,
the data age. Also, the data collected in one-on-one sessions could be more subjective than if gathered in a
group setting. If peer pressure does not overtake a status meeting, more objective data will likely be available
as people question the reports.
Forms are another way to collect data. Team members complete the forms with status data and submit them to
the project office for processing. The data are then compiled. Ideally, the forms are computer-based and team
members can forward them electronically for quick, easy compilation.
Collecting data on forms presents a challenge, however. Getting the forms submitted on time is one problem,
since some people often procrastinate. The other is that forms may get lost. Both problems grow in magnitude
as the number of team members gets larger.
Informal modes of data collection include holding ad hoc sessions, using word of mouth, and relying on your
own judgment regarding status. Informal modes are quicker and involve less administrative hassles; they are
the path of least resistance. But the data collected may not be objective, resulting in a greater chance of error.
Still, many project managers rely on informal methods.
Perry decides to use both formal and informal modes of data collection. He uses status reviews to verify the
accuracy of the data collected in one-on-one sessions and via forms. But he also keeps his ears open for
additional information.
Data Validity and Reliability
When collecting data, Perry keeps two main concepts in mind: reliability and validity. Reliability implies
consistent resultsin other words, does the data yield reliable results? Validity involves the approach or tool
used to collect data. Does it influence the results, thereby introducing bias, which in turn slants the results?
Some validity errors include inconsistent application of measurement tools, failing to account for changing
circumstances, using a collection tool that guarantees a particular result, and undue influence by the
personality of the data collector. These are threats to data validity because they influence the data being
inputted and the information being derived.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


There are other examples of how collection efforts can negatively influence data reliability and validity.
The 90 percent syndrome. Team members say they have 90 percent completed a task; for its
remainder, it stays 90 percent complete. Then the task slides past its completion date. Of course, the
problem is that the last 10 percent proves the most difficult.
The Hawthorne effect. What was accomplished just prior to collection influences a persons estimate
of the amount of work done. The problem is that what was done last may not be significant, giving a
misleading impression.
Overly negative or positive data. Some team members always exaggerate, saying too much or too
little has been done.
The good news effect. Some team members tell the project manager what she wants to hear,
usually good news. Hence, the project manager does not get a balanced view.
Lies. Rather than give honest data, some people lie, figuring perhaps no one will know or the project
manager will eventually leave before anyone finds out.
Faulty data collection can have a big impact on project performance. Garbage in, garbage out: the quality of
output is only as good as the quality of input. Good data lead to good decision making; bad data lead to poor
decision making.
Assess Status
With reliable and valid data, Perry can assess overall project performance. Assessment involves determining
how well the project has and will achieve its goals. Perry focuses on three areas: schedule, cost, and quality.
Perry assesses status via two principal reviews, looking back (history) and looking forward (the future).
Looking at past performance is called tracking; projecting into the future using past performance is called
monitoring. Both are important for determining where the project has been and where it will be if the current
level of performance continues.
A key concept behind assessing status is variance, the difference between what is planned and what has
actually occurred up to a specific point. The formula is quite simple:
Variance = planned actual
Title
-----------
If the difference between the two is zero or a positive number, then the project is proceeding as expected,
whether from a cost, schedule, or quality perspective. If the difference between the planned and the actual is a
negative number, then the project is not progressing as anticipated. Quality variance is discussed in Chapter
16; the remainder of this chapter deals with cost and schedule variances.
It is important to note, however, that variance is a deviation from what is expected. The deviation in itself
may not necessarily mean something is wrongit can indicate something good, too. A variance is a signal to
investigate the situation and determine whether to take action.
Determining Variance
The tracking portion of the variance calculation is the actual to date. The monitoring portion is the estimate at
completion; it is based on actual progress to date plus the remainder of work to do, assuming the current rate
of progress is maintained.
Cost variance is calculated by using this equation:
Cost variance = budgeted cost actual cost
The equation result tells Perry whether he has spent more money than planned up to a specific point in time.
He calculates it for each task, which in turn is accumulated to give the total estimate at completion for the
entire project. A positive value is called an underrun and a negative one is called an overrun. Exhibit 15-1
shows examples of cost variances on the Smythe Project.
Exhibit 15-1. Cost variances.
Smythe Project Budget Sheet
$ in Thousands
April 16, _____
Task
Budget to
Date
Actual to
Date Underrun Overrun
Total
Budget
Estimate at
Completion
6.1.1.1
Identify limousine
service to church
168 360 192 840 1,032
6.1.1.2
Coordinate limousine
service to church
56 104 48 280 328
6.1.1.3
Identify limousine
service to reception
168 110 58 840 782
6.1.1.4
Coordinate limousine
service to reception
56 124 68 280 348
Schedule variance follows the same pattern. It is the difference between planned and actual start and end
dates, respectively. This variance tells Perry whether he has spent more time than planned on a task up to a
specific point in time. He calculates it for each task, which in turn is accumulated to give the total estimate at
completion for the entire project. A positive value represents an ahead-of-schedule condition while a negative
one represents a behind-schedule situation. Exhibit 15-2 has some examples from the Smythe Project.
Earned Value
In the previous section, cost and schedule variances were treated independently. There is, however, a way to
treat them as an integrated entity, called earned value. It is the preferred way to measure project performance.
Earned value consists of three basic variables:
Exhibit 15-2. Project schedule sheet.
Smythe Project Schedule Sheet
April 16, _____
Task Early Start Early Finish
Duration
(days) Actual Start
Actual
Finish
Estimate at
Completion
6.1.1.1
Identify limousine
service to church
April 1 April 3 3 April 2 April 5 April 5
6.1.1.2
Coordinate limousine
service to church
April 7 April 7 1 April 9 April 11
6.1.2.1
Determine
transportation
requirements to
church
April 4 April 6 3 April 6 April 7 April 7
6.1.2.2
Coordinate
transportation to
church
April 7 April 8 2 April 7
6.1.2.5
Arrange for valet
service for church
April 9 April 9 1
Budgeted cost for work scheduled
Budgeted cost for work performed
Actual cost of work performed
The budgeted cost for work scheduled (BCWS) is the estimated cost for a task, or group of tasks, that are
scheduled to be performed for a specific time period. In other words, it is the estimated value of the work
scheduled. The budgeted cost for work performed (BCWP) is the estimated cost that is approved for a task or
group of tasks, to be completed up to a specific period of time. In other words, it is the estimated value of the
work completed up to a specific point in time. The actual cost of work performed (ACWP) is the actual costs
accrued for a task, or group of tasks, up to a specific point in time.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


The BCWS, BCWP, and ACWP are all instrumental in calculating the cost variance (CV) and the schedule
variance (SV), which in turn are used to assess individual and project performance. Here are the calculations
for both:
CV = BCWP - ACWP
SV = BCWP - BCWS
For the Smythe Project example (using $ in thousands):
CV = 200 (or BCWP) - 300 (or ACWP) = - 100, indicating a cost overrun
SV = 200 (or BCWP) - 220 (or BCWS) = - 20, indicating behind schedule
For ease of calculation, the best approach is to convert the cost variance and schedule variance to percentages:
CV % = (BCWP - ACWP) / BCWP
SV % = (BCWP - BCWS) / BCWS
For the Smythe Project example (using $ in thousands):
CV %= (BCWP - ACWP) / BCWP
= (200 - 300) / 200
= -50%, indicating a cost overrun
SV %= (BCWP - BCWS) / BCWS
= (200 - 220) / 220
= -9%, indicating the task is behind
schedule
The values are then plotted cumulatively over time for all three variables as shown in Exhibit 15-3. Again,
this can be performed for one task or the entire project.
After calculating the BCWS, BCWP, and the ACWP, Perry can determine in what combination of the
following circumstances he might find the project:
BCWP = BCWS On Schedule
Title
-----------
BCWP < BCWS Behind Schedule
BCWP > BCWS Ahead of Schedule
BCWP = ACWP Meeting Cost Target
BCWP < ACWP Cost Overrun
BCWP > ACWP Cost Underrun
Exhibit 15-3Earned value.
The BCWS, BCWP, and ACWP also are useful for determining overall project performance. The measures
for doing so are the cost performance index (CPI) and the schedule performance index (SPI), which are
calculated as:
CPI = BCWP / ACWP or planned costs / actual costs
SPI = BCWP / BCWS or planned costs scheduled costs
Smythe Project example ($ in thousands):
CPI = BCWP / ACWP
= 200 / 300 = .66, indicating cost
performance is not very
efficient since the result is less than
1.00
SPI = BCWP / BCWS
= 200 / 220 = .91, indicating
schedule performance is not
very efficient since the result is
less than 1.00
The measure of performance is determined by how close the calculated value approximates 1.00. If the CPI
and SPI are less than 1.00, then performance needs improvement. If greater than 1.00, then performance
exceeds expectations. This can be performed for one, a group, or all tasks on the project.
Making Performance Assessment Count
A project plan serves no purpose if no one knows or cares if it is being followed. Perry, therefore, regularly
keeps a pulse on the schedule and cost performance of the project. He collects and analyzes data to ensure
that plan and reality match as closely as possible. If a variance exists, he determines whether to take corrective
action. Of course, a variance can exist for quality as much as it does for cost and schedule. Perry knows that
and ensures that metrics also exist to measure quality.
Questions for Getting Started
1.When collecting data for determining cost and schedule status, did you determine:
Expertise needed?
Mode of collection (e.g., formal versus informal)?
Obstacles you will face?
Tools to do the job?
Type of information infrastructure you want in place?
Ways to communicate the value of collecting status?
2.In regard to status reviews, did you determine whether to collect data prior to or during the
meetings?
3.When collecting data, did you identify the threats to reliability? To validity? How will you deal with
those threats?
4.When assessing status, what variables will you look at? Variances? Cost variance? Schedule
variance? Earned value? How will you go about calculating them and how often? Will the calculations
be for selected tasks or the entire project?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 16
Quality Assessment: Metrics
In Chapter 15, Perry developed ways to assess performance with regard to cost and schedule variances.
Quality assessment is the other element in monitoring performance.
Establishing measurements for quality is a way to identify opportunities to reduce waste, determine how the
project is achieving its goals, ascertain trends, and establish baselines for future projects.
Quality can have several meanings, so Perry defines the word in terms of his project. After consulting the
customer and reviewing project documentation (the statement of work), he defines quality as service that
satisfies a defined degree of excellence. In terms of the Smythe Project, quality is satisfying the requirements
set by the Smythe family. Focusing on his customers requirements, Perry can determine the measurements to
use. Metrics are the tools and techniques he will use to track and assess quality.
Introduction to Metrics
There are two basic categories of metrics, qualitative and quantitative. Qualitative metrics are intangible,
noncalibrated measures. Examples include degree of customer satisfaction and degree of importance. These
metrics are subjective. Quantitative metrics are tangible, calibrated measures. Examples include financial
analysis and parametrics. These metrics are objective.
Qualitative and quantitative metrics can be used to measure the satisfaction of the customers requirements, as
well as the efficiency and effectiveness of processes for building a product or delivering a service. In their
simplest form, quality metrics measure the relationship between the number of errors and a unit of measure.
An error is the difference between what is expected and what has occurredin other words, a variance.
Of course, Perry knows that metrics do not happen spontaneously. He must set up a process for collecting
data, then analyzing the results. So Perry takes the following actions.
1.He determines what to measure. The statement of work provides much information; however, he
also interviews the customer and examines the metrics used for earlier projects of a similar nature.
2.He seeks agreement on what metrics to use. There are quantitative and qualitative metrics, simple
Title
-----------
and complex. People must see the value of a metric; otherwise, they will not support the collection
efforts or respect the results.
3.He obtains the software to perform the metrics. These include project management software,
database applications, and modeling packages.
The Collection and Analysis of Data
Perry must build a good database. Without data he cannot do much. If the data lack reliability and validity,
they produce useless results. But having good project management disciplines in place will help in collecting
reliable, valid data. Perry has the expertise to collect good data, including statistical knowledge, analytical
prowess, and communications skills. Without these skills, establishing the metrics would be extremely
difficult. Also, Perry must exercise discipline when implementing the metrics. This means collecting data
regularly and using comparable methods over time.
Perry follows five steps to measure quality: (1) identifying what needs to be measured, (2) collecting the data,
(3) compiling the data, (4) analyzing the data, and (5) communicating the results.
Identify the Measures
As noted earlier, there are multiple ways to identify what needs to be measured. Perry reviews project and
technical documentation. He meets with people directly as well as remotely connected to the project. He
reviews the history of similar projects. He selects benchmarks, or examples from other companies against
which to compare his results. In any event, he must have buy-in for whatever methods he chooses. Without
buy-in, support may decline.
Of course, the audience will largely dictate what metrics to use. The project team may want to measure
technical aspects. Senior management and the customer may want measurements of customer satisfaction.
Perry is interested in measuring his project management. In any question of determinants, business
considerations should be first. Ultimately, customer satisfaction is the quality metric.
A way to determine business metrics is to identify key project indicators, or KPI. These are elements of a
project that contribute to successful completion of a project. On the Smythe Project, a KPI is the number of
complaints about the bridal shower. To identify KFIs, determine all the processes involved in project
management, process management, and technical performance. Then, with selected representatives, rank
those processes and select the most important top ten.
PDCA
A useful concept for performing metrics is the Plan, Do, Check, Act cycle, also known as the PDCA Wheel
or the Deming Wheel.
The Plan is developing an approach for improving a process or implementing a metric or both. The Do is
turning the plan into reality by executing it. The Check is determining if the improvement or metric is
working. The Act is making any changes to improve the process or metric. The cycle is shown below.
This cycle repeats throughout the process or measurement; it ensures stepwise refinement of the plan.
In reality, the PDCA cycle can be applied to any decision-making endeavor. Managing a project lends itself
to application of the PDCA cycle; project plans are continually revised to reflect reality.
Whatever the metrics chosen, Perry answers the following questions for each measurement tool:
Who is the metric for?
What purpose will it serve?
How often will the measurement be taken?
What is the formula?
What is the data source?
Collect the Data
Perry uses data from the project data repository created by his project management software. He ensures the
data are current, thanks to input from status review.
In addition to the data repository, he searches the project history files and project library for relevant data. He
can access completed forms, past reports, and memos. He also uses alternative sources like the Internet for
data in the public domain and available through think tanks.
Compile the Data
Perry must put the data into a usable format. One of his first actions is to cleanse the data, identifying bad
(irrelevant) data and standardizing it (putting it into the same format). Perry sorts the data, reviews it to
determine any anomalies (e.g., alphabetic characters in a numeric field) and ensures that it has all the decimal
points in the right place. While doing this, he avoids introducing bias, which would influence the results. For
example, he removes data to which he might respond subjectively, such as data originating from a person or
system that he dislikes.
Data are raw, while information is data in a meaningful form. Perry has several tools to convert data into
information, including Pareto charts, checksheets, scattergrams, histograms, control charts, and trend charts.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Pareto charts display information to determine the potential causes of a problem. A bar chart (not a Gantt
chart) shows the major categories or elements on the x-axis and the prioritized numbers of a result (e.g.,
number of complaints) on the y-axis, as shown in Exhibit 16-1. The highest bar has the greatest likelihood of
being the cause of the problem.
Checksheets are documents that record the frequency of distribution of incidents. Each occurrence is recorded
in an interval identified, as shown in Exhibit 16-2. The information identifies what intervals have the greatest
and least number of occurrences. The checksheet also graphically displays information in the form of a
histogram, as shown in Exhibit 16-3.
Scattergrams, sometimes called scatter or correlation charts, show the relationship between two variables, as
shown in Exhibit 16-4. Normal relationships are bunched together; the abnormal relationships are outside
the bunch, thereby indicating an anomalous situation.
Control charts, like the scattergrams, identify normal and anomalous situations, specifically variance from the
average. Upper permissible and lower levels of variation are identified. As with the scattergram, the focus in
on variation, with emphasis on reducing erratic behavior. To better understand control charts, heres an
example for building one.
Exhibit 16-1.Pareto chart example.
Exhibit 16-2.Checksheet example.
Six hotels are interested in knowing the average number of complaints during the summer season. The analyst
collects data from these six hotels and compiles them in the table on pages 157 and 158.
Title
-----------
Exhibit 16-3.Histogram example.
Exhibit 16-4.Scattergram example.
Hotel Average Number of Complaints
A 30
B 40
C 60
D 80
E 35
F 25
270
Before drawing the control chart, the analyst determines the average average, and the upper and lower
limits of the control chart. The average average is the sum of the averages divided by the sample size, or N
(the number of hotels participating); thus, 270 divided by 6 equals 45. See the control chart in Exhibit 16-5 for
a plotted graph. The equation for the upper control limit is
The equation for the upper control limit is
For the lower control limit, the equation is:
Thus, the average number of complaints for Hotel D is out of control because it falls outside these boundaries.
Exhibit 16-5.Control chart example.
Trend charts track past performance and forecast results based on history. As shown in Exhibit 16-6, the chart
shows the relationship between two variables. On the x-axis is a time span and on the y-axis is the value of a
variable.
Using trend charts can be dangerous as well as useful. On the one hand, they require assuming that the future
environment will be as in the past, thereby permitting forecasting. On the other hand, they enable long-range
planning and playing what-if scenarios.
Analyze the Data
After compiling the data, Perry analyzes it. He reviews diagrams and looks at statistical compilations. Below
is a table showing the compilation techniques employed and flags for assessing issues dealing with quality.
Compilation Technique Flag
Pareto chart Tallest bar indicates the largest driver for the cause
of the problem.
Checksheets Longest frequency of occurrences for a variable;
thereby reflecting the focus of attention.
Scattergram The most frequent occurrences and anomalies; the
latter indicating a problem vis--vis normal behavior.
Control chart Exceeding the upper control limit or going below the
lower control limit, thereby indicating possible erratic,
uncontrollable behavior of a process.
Trend chart Upward or downward slope of the line, indicating a
potential problem if the trend continues.
When analyzing the data, Perry will use several standard statistical calculationsspecifically, mean, median,
mode, and standard deviation. The mean is the average of the values for items in a group of data. The mean is
best used when the original data are large enough not to be skewed by extreme values. The median is a
position average at the midpoint for a frequency distribution. The median is best used when extreme values in
the frequency distribution could distort the data. The mode is the value that appears most frequently in a series
of numbers. The mode is used to avoid distortion by extreme values.
Standard deviation is another useful calculation. It determines the degree that each occurrence in a frequency
distribution is located from the mean. In other words, it measures dispersion.
Exhibit 16-6.Trend chart example.
Exhibits 16-7 and 16-8 are examples of how to calculate the mean, median, mode, and standard deviation,
respectively. In our example, the limousine service providing transportation for the Smythe wedding from the
church to the reception wants to know the travel time between the two locations. The data they collected for
five transportation times in minutes are shown below:
Another quick, easy way to analyze data is to divide the data into quartiles, or four equal parts, after forming
an array. The analyst counts down the array until he identifies the final item in the first 25 percent and then
calculates up the array. Then he selects the midpoint between the end of the first and the top of the fourth
quartile.
For example, on page 161 is a table of customer responses to a hotel survey of customer satisfaction. The
hotel wants to know the results of their questionnaire, by quartiles. The calculation is shown in Exhibit 16-9.
Fishbone Chart
Not all quality measurement tools are quantitative. The fishbone chart, also known as the Cause and Effect
Diagram, is a diagramming method that identifies the cause of a problem by connecting four Ms: machines,
manpower, materials, and methods. At the end of the fishbone is a description of the effect of the problem.
An example fishbone diagram is shown below:
The fishbone diagram helps you determine if additional research is necessary to verify a cause. In addition,
you can use the diagram to determine another process that will reduce problems associated with machines,
manpower, materials, and methods.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Rating Value
Number of
Customer Responses Quartile 1 Quartile 2 Quartile 3
Poor 1 5 5 5 5
Fair 2 0 0 0 0
Good 3 25 20 (of 25) 25 25
Very Good 4 30 20 (of 30) 30
Excellent 5 40 15 (of 40)
25 50 75
Exhibit 16-7. Mean, median, and mode calculations.
Mean
The mean, or average, is calculated by summing the numbers from column A (60) and then dividing by the
number of samples taken (also called N). The formula is:
Average time = sum of column A/N
= 60/5 = 12, which is the average travel time between the two locations.
Median
The median is the middle number in a list of numbers. For our example, Perry arranges the numbers in
column A from low to high: 9, 10, 10, 12, 19. The middle number of these five numbers is the third number,
which is 10. Thus the median, or average, travel time between the two locations is 10.
Mode
The mode is the number occurring most frequently in a list of numbers. Again, Perry arranges the numbers
in column A from low to high: 9, 10, 10, 12, 19. The number occurring most frequently is 10. Thus the
Title
-----------
mode, or average, travel time between the two locations is 10.
The Results of Data Analysis
After converting his data into information and analyzing it, Perry win communicate the results. He does that
in several ways, such as in a presentation or by sending e-mail. Whichever method he chooses, he states his
assumptionshe does not hide them. For example, he might state that the information in the trend chart
assumes that the project will proceed at the current pace.
Also, he portrays the data honestly and openly. He does not outlay charts or other information to cover up or
skew the messages. Finally, he is consistent when collecting and reporting the information. Consistency
ensures timely and useful information. Otherwise, he will have a credibility problem with the metrics.
Summing Up Quality Assessment
Collecting and analyzing metrics takes considerable time and effort. Perry knows, therefore, that it is
imperative to define and get agreement upon what quality means, what metrics are necessary, and how to
calculate them prior to taking the first step. He then proceeds to implement metrics for the project, which in
turn provide a baseline for managing change.
Exhibit 16-8.Standard deviation calculation.
Questions for Getting Started
1.Do you know exactly what the customers requirements are? If relevant, the internal customer? The
external customer?
2.Is there an agreed-upon definition of what constitutes quality?
3.Did you get agreement on what to measure?
4.Did you get agreement on what metrics to use?
Exhibit 16-9. Quartile example.
From the table on page 161, Perry determines a quartile by taking the total number of customer responses
(100) and dividing it into fourths. Thus, 100 divided by 4 equals 25. The following calculates the quartiles
using the example in the table.
Perry now begins to calculate the first quartile. The poor rating contains five responses. The first quartile,
however, is 25; therefore, he is 20 responses short (25 - 5). Thus, he must go to fair, the next class, which
has 0 responses. When 0 is added to 5, Perry is still 20 responses short of the first quartile. From the next
higher class, good, there are 25 responses; Perry needs 20 of those 25 to calculate the first quartile.
The formula for the first quartile is:
1 [from the "poor" rating] + 20/25 [from the "good" rating] = 1.8
Perry calculates the second quartile by taking the first-half of the responses, or 100 divided by 2, which
equals 50. He now needs to add the 5 poor responses, 0 fair responses, 25 good responses, and 20 of
the 30 very good responses to equal 50.
The formula for the second quartile is:
3 [the good rating] + 20/30 [from the very good rating] = 3.7
Perry calculates the third quartile by taking the first three-fourths of the responses, or three-fourths of 100,
which equals 75 responses. He now needs to add the 5 poor responses, 0 fair responses, 25 good
responses, 30 very good responses, and 15 of the 40 excellent responses to equal 75.
The formula for the third quartile is:
4 [the very good rating] + 15/40 [from the excellent rating] = 4.4
Hence, 25 percent of the respondents, or the first quartile, gave the hotel a rating of 1.8, which is
approximately fair. The second quartile, or 50 percent of the respondents, gave the hotel a rating of 3.7,
which is almost very good. This means that 50 percent of the customers gave the hotel a rating of very
good or lower. For the third quartile, 75 percent of the respondents rated the hotel between very good
and excellent. This means that 75 percent of the customers gave the hotel a rating between very good
and excellent or lower.
5.Have you identified what databases to use for metrics? Are the data reliable and valid?
6.Have you identified the expertise needed to perform the metrics? Is that expertise available? If not,
how will you get that expertise?
7.Have you identified the hardware and software tools to do metrics? Are those tools available? If not,
how will you get those tools?
8.How often do you plan to collect metrics?
9.Do you plan to use qualitative or quantitative metrics or both?
10.Are business considerations the major determinants of what metrics to use? If not, did you get
buy-in to the metrics you plan to develop?
11.Have you identified your key process indicators (KBIs)?
12.For quantitative metrics, have you developed a formula? Did you get buy-in to the formula?
13.When using data for calculating metrics, did you cleanse the data? Standardize the data?
14.If developing Pareto charts, did you define the x- and y-axes? The flags to look for?
15.If using checksheets, did you determine the intervals to record each occurrence? Do you plan to
display this information in the form of a histogram? The flags to look for?
16.If developing a histogram, did you define the x- and y-axes? The flags to look for?
17.If developing a control chart, did you identify the upper and lower control limits? The flags to look
for?
18.If developing a trend chart, did you define the x- and y-axes? The flags to look for?
19.Do you need to calculate the mean? Median? Mode? Standard deviation? Quartile?
20.Do you have a plan for communicating the results?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 17
Managing Changes to the Project
Ideally, Perry would like the Smythe Project to proceed as smoothly as possible that is, according to plan.
Yet he knows that nothing goes exactly according to plan. A project environment is dynamic, not static, and
changes will have to be made.
Managing Change
The key to handling project changes is to not resist them but to manage them. Perry puts in place good change
management disciplines that will help him determine whether to implement contingency plans to deal with
unanticipated events, take corrective action to get back on schedule, or make new plans for part of the project.
Each action he will take significantly impacts project execution.
Managing change makes good practical sense. It helps Perry focus on the plan by identifying variances. It
helps him maintain control by providing feedback on what is and should be happening at each step. Finally, it
allows him the opportunity to adjust or modify plans so the goals remain realistic.
Of course, Perry knows that managing change is not easy. The project is constantly moving ahead, making it
difficult to get an accurate snapshot. The right information in the right form at the right time is not readily
available and in some cases is nonexistent. It takes time to develop and implement an infrastructure to detect,
review, evaluate, and respond to changes. To deal with these obstacles and challenges, Perry must meet
certain requirements.
1.He must have reliable, valid information. Bad data lead to bad information, which in turn can result
in bad decisions.
2.He must have baselines to measure against. The baselines typically relate to cost, schedule, and
quality. The baseline is the criterion against which to judge actual performance. The variance is the
difference between what is supposed to be and what is. Perry must make decisions regarding any
variance. Those decisions might be to do nothing or to make changes.
3.He must have people who are adaptable to change. They should not be reactionaries or
revolutionists, but realists. Presumably he has chosen such team members, but if not, he must determine
Title
-----------
how to deal with anyone who is overly resistant to change.
4.He must establish an infrastructure to manage change. He must institute policies, processes, and
procedures for reviewing, analyzing, and responding to change. He must communicate these policies,
processes, and procedures to team members. This infrastructure should also include people who are
responsible for identifying, reviewing, analyzing, and responding to changes. If necessary, these people
should help with scheduling, tracking, and monitoring the implementation of changes.
Perry will need to have a medium for capturing changes and tracking their fate, from identification to
disposition. The medium, typically an electronic or hard copy form, is shown in Exhibit 17-1.
Exhibit 17-1.Approved request form.
Decision-Making Basics
As a project manager, you will make decisions throughout a project. The hardest decisions with the most
risk come during latter phases, when the time is less and the impact more acute. Remember the following
basics of decision making.
1.Know when a decision is required. Be able to look at circumstances and determine if a decision is
necessary. Usually an anomaly or variance to a plan signals the need for a decision.
2.Determine your objectives. In other words, the decision must be purposeful.
3.Develop several alternatives. Brainstorm either by yourself or with team members.
4.Select the alternative that promises to provide the greatest payoff. How do you determine which
alternative that is? By developing a method, such as a weighted point scheme, to evaluate how well
each alternative satisfies the objectives. Then you rank the alternatives by score. The alternative with
the highest score is the one you select.
5.Develop and implement a plan. Since a project manager rarely has command and control over
team members, get buy-in for your plan.
6.Seek feedback while implementing the plan. This feedback will help you to refine the plan and
indicate how well you are achieving the objectives.
Types of Changes
To identify whether a change is necessary, Perry establishes a series of baselines. Baselines are agreed-upon
points of reference. In the project environment, baselines are set for schedule, budget, and quality.
Ideally, a project proceeds according to its baselines. However, variances can occur, and the project manager
must decide how to respond to those variances. First, however, the project manager analyzes and evaluates the
nature of a change. Many changes are internal, such as adjusting how a task is done because of an unrealistic
specification. Other changes originate from external sources. The customer or senior management may, for
example, arbitrarily reduce funding or change scope.
Perry develops a classification scheme for such changes. He classifies them as major, minor, or corrective.
A major change dramatically affects schedule, cost, or quality. Examples include across-the-board
cuts in budget, expansion of the scope of the project without increasing the budget, or acceleration of
the scheduled completion date.
A minor change is one that does not fit in the major category. Examples include a small change in the
specifications or requirements.
A corrective change is nice to have but unnecessary. An example might be addressing an overlooked
nice-to-have specification.
Whether major, minor, or corrective, Perry assigns each change a priority. A priority can be either major,
minor, or deferral.
A high priority change demands immediate attention. It is a show stopper. Generally, such changes
are major changes, too, but not necessarily. The customer, for example, would like to significantly
change the specifications, but the change is not doable without substantial changes to the schedule,
budget, or quality of the desired result.
A medium priority change does not require immediate attention. However, it must be addressed
before the project ends. An example is an important but small change to the specifications.
A low priority change is addressed, if time permits. These changes include nice-to-have features or
offers in a product or service, respectively.
Perry, of course, does not alone make decisions or change categories and priorities. He forms a change board,
which consists of people responsible for classifying and prioritizing changes. The people on the change board
are typically the project manager, selected team members, and customer representatives.
The change board does more, however, than just categorize and prioritize changes. It also analyzes the impact
of such changes on cost, schedule, and quality. It approves or disapproves the changes, and it assigns
responsibilities for executing these changes.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Corrective Action
Sometimes the contingency plans do not work or an unanticipated event occurs. Either case, it impacts cost,
schedule, and quality and requires corrective action. This means taking steps to get the project back on track.
To take corrective action, Perry must address some challenges.
1.He must have sufficient data to define the problem and determine a solution.
2.He must distinguish between causes and symptoms. Using good analytical techniques can help, but
so will good data, especially if it answers the who, what, when, where, why, and how of the situation.
3.He must respond quickly. Procrastination and indecisiveness can convert a problem into a crisis.
4.He must recognize that corrective action occurs throughout the project cycle. There is a tendency for
project managers to think that ever-thing is fine up front, only to be surprised toward the end that
corrective action should have been taken earlier.
5.He must seek feedback on the corrective action taken. The feedback should indicate whether the
problem disappeared.
Replanning
If corrective actions are inadequate, Perry knows the next step: replanning. Replanning is redoing the project
plan by making wholesale changes to cost, schedule, and quality factors.
There are several reasons for replanning. First, it makes more sense to follow a realistic plan. Likewise, the
team works more efficiently because the changes have reduced confusion. The team is also more effective in
achieving the project goal.
To replan well, Perry must address certain prerequisites.
1.He must have reliable and valid data to determine whether replanning is necessary.
2.He must act quickly. If not, replanning will break synergy. It will also detract from productivity,
even under the old plan.
3.He and everyone else must have patience. Replanning takes effort and diagnosing past performance
can be sensitive. Some people do not want to replan; it only adds frustration. Other people fear being
blamed for the circumstances that led to the replanning.
Title
-----------
4.He does replanning as early as possible. During the early phases of a project, replanning is easier.
Many unknowns are expected and the momentum is just beginning. However, it is more difficult to
replan during the latter phases. The momentum is faster, people are rushing to accomplish major
milestones, and it becomes more costly to do any rework.
5.He understands the impact that replanning will have. Will the replanning be expensive? How much
time and other resources will be required to replan? When must replanning be complete? What impact
will replanning have on cost, schedule, and quality?
When replanning, Perry remembers that there is no such thing as a free lunch. If he decides to schedule, there
will be negative and positive effects. The same can be said for cost, quality, and people factors.
Problem Solving
Life is full of problems, and projects have their share. These problems can overwhelm the best project
managers. It is important, therefore, to approach identifying and solving problems systematically.
Here are some rudimentary steps for solving problems.
1.Define the situation. That is, determine the variables or factors that indicate whether a problem
exists. Sliding of tasks on the critical path is an example.
2.Keep your cool. Do not let your emotions rule you and do not jump to conclusions. Focus on
defining the problem, answering the who, what, when, where, why, and how.
3.Do not confuse symptoms with causes. It is easy to misdiagnose the problem by focusing on a
symptom. Look at the big picture and then narrow to the issue. Define the problem in one or two
sentences.
4.Keep personality out of the picture. Liking or disliking someone usually has nothing to do with a
problem; failure to recognize that fact can cloud your objectivity in developing a meaningful solution.
5.Develop a plan. Devise a miniature project plan, if you will, to implement a solution.
6.Seek feedback. You may have addressed the cause but perhaps not in a way that completely fixes
the problem. Feedback will help you to refine your plan and achieve your solution.
Perry, for instance, decides to change the logic of the network diagram because the Smythe family wants to
have the bridal shower two weeks earlier. The Smythe family also wants to increase the number of attendees
by 20 percent and add more events. All this affects the schedule, of course, but also the scope of the project.
The changes also have positive and negative impacts. A positive impact is satisfying the customer; a negative
impact is temporarily slowing the momentum of the project, which in turn reduces productivity.
Contingency Planning
Ideally, risk assessment (see Chapter 12) provides the basis for good contingency planning. Contingency
planning involves developing responses to situations that have a good probability of occurrence and could
impact project performance.
Exhibit 17-2Contingency plan form.
For the Smythe Project, Perry develops a contingency form, shown in Exhibit 17-2. He records the description
of the event; its probability of occurrence; its impact on cost, schedule, and quality; and the appropriate
response.
Reliable contingency plans dont just happen, as Perry well knows. They require having information about
possible events, including their potential impact; time preparation; and feedback indicating when the events
do occur.
Summing Up Change Management
The project environment is not static. No matter what plans or baseline he establishes, Perry knows that he
will have to evaluate and implement changes. He also knows that change affects costs, schedule, quality, or a
combination of them. He is determined to manage change; otherwise, change will manage him and he can
quickly lose control.
Questions for Getting Started
1.If you decided to take corrective action, did you:
Determine exactly what caused the need for corrective action?
Determine the most appropriate corrective action and implement it?
Receive input from the people affected by the corrective action?
Set a blockpoint date for the corrective action to be implemented?
Communicate the corrective action in advance?
Seek feedback after the corrective action was implemented?
2.If replanning, did you:
Determine what is the cause for replanning?
Determine what areas (e.g., cost, schedule, quality) of the project are affected by the
replanning? The negative and positive impacts?
Determine resource requirements and their availability for resource planning?
Determine the data and information requirements for replanning?
Obtain input from all of the people affected by the replanning?
Obtain feedback from all the affected people once the new plans went into effect?
3.If doing contingency planning, did you:
Determine and document the possible events using the risk assessment?
For each event, determine and document the probability of occurrence, the projected impact,
and the appropriate response?
Make sure the plans are readily available?
Assign someone responsible for upkeeping and executing the contingency plan?
Receive input from the people affected by the contingency plan?
Obtain and assess relevant feedback from the individuals affected by the contingency plan after
it has been implemented?
4.Did you establish a change management infrastructure that includes a means for:
Classifying changes?
Prioritizing changes?
Evaluating changes (e.g., change board)?
Documenting changes?
Tracking, monitoring, and addressing changes?
Communicating changes?
Following up on changes?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Chapter 18
Project Closure
All projects eventually end. Some end successfully, others end in disasters. Some common reasons why
projects end poorly are changing market conditions, lack of cooperation from clients, lack of management
support, lack of resources, politics, technical problems, and poor management. Exhibit 18-1 sums up the
management reasons for failure, while Exhibit 18-2 lists reasons for success.
Fortunately for Perry, the Smythe Project ended successfully: the wedding proceeded as planned, meeting all
milestone dates on time, consuming all monies within the budgeted amount, and giving the Smythe family
exactly what they wanted. Unlike other weddings, the teams morale was extremely high up to the very end.
Despite overwhelming success, not everything worked perfectly. Some communications, coordination, and
implementation problems arose, and projects Perry handles in the future will benefit from what he learned.
Exhibit 18-1. Common reasons for project failure.
Leading Organizing
Avoiding conflict Lacking resources
Burning out of team members Lacking accurate knowledge and expertise
Delaying decision making Having unclear authorities and responsibilities
Lacking cooperation
Lacking customer involvement Controlling
Lacking senior management support Failing to deal with a changing environment
Communicating poorly Failing to manage change
Setting unrealistic expectations Overemphasizing on technology issues at expense of
business issues
Defining Competing too much for resources
Having ill-defined, too large, too small a scope
Having incomplete or unclear requirements Closure
Title
-----------
Finding errors too late
Planning Failing to learn from past problems
No planning
Poorly formulating plans
Having unclear, unrealistic plans
Exhibit 18-2. Common reasons for project success.
Leading Organizing
Having the support of senior management Assigning responsibility for well-defined deliverables
Obtaining customer involvement
Maintaining realistic expectations Having a good communication infrastructure in place
Encouraging and sustaining a sense of owner
ship by all participants
Having clear lines of authorities and responsibilities
Having commitment and cooperation of all
participants
Having a team with requisite knowledge and expertise
Promoting integrity
Defining Controlling
Chunking the project into manageable pieces Having a documented change management in place
Keep the scope well-defined
Clear definition of requirements Holding regular and frequent meetings
Focus on customer Avoiding scope creep
Clear mission and objectives Taking regular measurements of performance
Planning Closure
Focusing evenly on technical and business
issues
Releasing people correctly to minimize impacton morale
and performance
Developing meaningful plans
Having more frequent project milestones
Having shorter flow time
Simplifying
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Learning From Past Experience
Perry collects and compiles statistics from the project by using the project data repository. Mainly the
measurements used during the project, these data help Perry ascertain what did and did not go well. He plans
to include the information in a special document.
The lessons-learned document captures the successes, challenges, and other information of a project.
Managers of similar projects in the future can refer to what is in the document and, consequently, operate
more efficiently and effectively. The lessons-learned document not only communicates useful information to
future project managers, but also helps to identify their own strengths and weaknesses. But these advantages
can be realized only if the document is well prepared. The outline for a lessons-learned document is shown in
Exhibit 18-3. Many times, the document is poorly written, contains unsubstantiated claims and personal
grandstanding, and is filed in an inaccessible place. To ensure that these shortcomings do not appear, Perry
takes the following actions.
Exhibit 18-3. Outline for a lessons-learned document.
Lessons-Learned Document
I.Present title page, which includes:
A.Document title
B.Document number
C.Original release date
D.Appropriate signatures and date
II.Present table of contents, which includes:
A.Section headings
B.Relevant page numbers
III.Present introduction, which includes:
A.Goals
B.Scope
C.Objectives, like
Title
-----------
Technical
Business
D.History/background information
IV.Present events, and what went right; what went wrong, and what was done; and what might have
been done otherwise, which include:
A.Activities
B.Critical items
C.Major milestone deliverables
D.Political actions
E.Roadblocks
V.Present summary, which includes a wrap-up of the project
1.He ensures that the data are useful. This task is easy since he has collected reliable, valid measures
throughout the project.
2.He identifies other sources of information. Since he collected and organized data throughout the
project, this action is easy. He especially uses the information in the project history files.
3.He assigns someone on the noncritical path to do the preliminary work for preparing the document.
This includes collecting documents and data, as well as preparing the draft. This approach allows Perry
to handle concurrent activities during project closure.
Information Systems Projects: A Lesson for Everyone
Although project failure appears in all industries, information systems (IS) projects seem to get special
attention. Their record of successes and failures has been referred to by some as a crapshoot.
Its no surprise. The news is replete with examples of IS projects having disastrous results. The state of
Washington stopped developing a system that would process drivers licenses and vehicle registration; the
project was several years behind schedule and millions of dollars over budget. California had even more
disastrous results while developing a large PC-based networkthe project was millions of dollars over
budget and lasted over twelve years. And as with Washington, California had a Department of Motor
Vehicles project that blew its schedule and exceeded its budget. Then there is the Oregon Driver and Motor
Vehicle Services project, which has exceeded twice its original cost estimate.
Do not blame the public sector, however. The private sector has had its share of failures. The Xerox IS
project, called the Market to Collection Project, passed its scheduled completion date by two years and
exceeded its budget.
These examples may be more common than first realized. In the late 1980s, Capers Jones, president of
Software Productivity Research, revealed some sobering statistics about projects with more than 64,000
lines of code. He noted that less than 1 percent finished on time, within budget, and met all user
requirements. The average project was more than a year late and the cost was double the estimate.
1
Almost seven years later, the Standish Group announced that IS development projects succeed only slightly
more than 1 percentthat is, finishing on time and within budget. If an organization is large, the success
rate drops.
2
1
Software Productivity and Quality, System Development, April 1987, pp. 1-6.
2
Few IS Projects Come in On Time, On Budget, Computerworld, December 12, 1994.
What are the major contributors to such dismal results? According to the Center for Project management, 73
percent of the companies it surveyed had inadequately defined project plans. Less than 25 percent had
well-defined and practical project management processes.
3
3
Pesky Projects, Computerworld, April 11, 1994, p. 118.
4.He solicits input from project participants for ideas and information to include in the document. This
ensures a more objective and complete document. He has team members review the draft to preclude
any biased content.
5.He submits the document to senior management, whose responsibility is to ensure that it is not
forgotten and apply its contents to similar projects in the future.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Releasing People and Equipment
At closure, Perry must release the people who have worked on the project. Releasing people is not simple. If
released inefficiently and ineffectively, morale problems can occur. If theres a feeling of pending disaster,
people may depart prematurely and leave tasks unfinished.
Since it is a matrix environment, Perry knows that prematurely releasing people may mean losing them
permanently. So he reviews the responsibility matrices and schedule to determine the remaining work. He
then releases only those without work, since people sitting idle will in time interfere with the others
productivity, spread rumors, or add unnecessary labor costs. Perry also ceases use of any unnecessary
equipment or facilities.
Recognizing and Rewarding People
No project is complete without recognition for outstanding performance. While conceptually simple, Perry
knows in reality its implementation is difficult. He must decide whether to reward individuals or the team or
both, what the most meaningful recognitions would be, and what rewards are within his power. These are
difficult to determine; still Perry follows some basic principles when giving recognition and rewards.
1.He strives for objectivity. He uses objective criteria for measuring results. It is hard to forget the past
or divorce yourself from the personalities of the individuals. The only way to avoid those circumstances
is to be as objective as possible.
2.He determines the values and behaviors he wants to reward. He rewards these values and behaviors
that best satisfy those of the company.
3.He remembers the expectancy theory. Expectancy theory states that successful performance depends
on peoples expectations of rewards, whether extrinsic or intrinsic. In other words, a persons
expenditure of effort depends on his or her expectations of reward. If a person expects a financial
reward and receives a nonfinancial one, morale might fall and productivity decline.
4.He appears fair and consistent. If several people gave outstanding performances, he gives them
equal recognition and rewards. Even the appearance of being unfair or inconsistent can cheapen a
recognition or reward.
5.He is timely. He presents the recognitions and rewards within a reasonable time to gain maximum
Title
-----------
motivational value. If he gives recognitions or rewards long after completing a milestone, for example,
they lose their meaning and impact.
6.He does not rely on monetary rewards. In fact, he avoids them. Money provides only short-term
satisfaction and can prove divisive, especially if a person feels shortchanged. He uses a variety of
nonfinancial rewards, from plaques to dinners to trips. For many project managers in a matrix
environment, such rewards may be all they are entitled to dispense.
Some Guidelines for Future Projects
Throughout the project, Perry kept a balance between the classical and the behavioral aspects of the project.
He knew that a detailed work structure or formal change control procedures are simply tools for completing
his project. In other words, they are the means to an end, not the end themselves. Using these tools requires
good judgment; therefore he was continually asking himself. Did the statement of work give a real portrayal
of what had to be done? Was the planning sufficient and could I have anticipated problems better? What
procedural changes would I make next time?
These are tough questions and often there are no definitive answers. Project managers must use their
judgment, which is based on their knowledge, experience, and expertise. Nevertheless, there are some general
guidelines that are useful for making good judgments.
1.The costlier the project, the more important it is that project management disciplines be in place. A
large monetary investment indicates a projects level of importancefor example, a $1 million project
is more important than a $10,000 one. It makes sense, therefore, that the monies for the larger project
are all accounted for and justifiable. Project management disciplines help ensure that inefficiencies do
not occur.
2.The larger the project team, the more important it is that project management be used. Larger project
teams present greater challenges for coordination and communication. For example, a fifty-person
project is more difficult to coordinate than a five-person one.
3.The greater the complexity of the final product, the more important it is that management disciplines
are in place. For example, building a state-of-the-art information system is more complex than building
an outdoor shed. The former requires greater coordination of personnel and resources.
4.The longer the project, the more important it is that all procedures and schedules be in place. Along
with more time to complete a project is the tendency to overlook the need for good project
management. The well do it later syndrome takes over and often results in key elements never being
implemented or implemented in a mad rush at the last minute. The project managers should identify
and implement as many elements as early as possible, before the project gains too much momentum.
5.The more ambiguity there is about a projects scope, the more discipline needs to be imposed on the
project. The project manager must define the goal of the project and develop a path for achieving it. If
the project lacks clarity of purpose, then coordination, communication, and other key activities become
difficult, even impossible.
6.A lack of precedence requires that more discipline be in place. If a project of a similar nature has
never been done, then theres a greater likelihood that management may be stymied. For example,
previous experience leads the way to greater efficiency and effectiveness.
7.The more dynamic the project environment, the more procedures and schedules should be in place.
If the environment is constantly in flux, then the project must be adaptable to change yet retain the
focus on the goal. Project management tools help achieve focus and adaptability by evaluating the
impact of changes as they appear.
The six functions of project management are critical to success; however the degree of application remains a
matter of judgment. These guidelines can help the project manager decide what tools and techniques should
be applied and to what degree. In the end, however, the project manager makes the decisions regarding
management of his or her project.
Questions for Getting Started
1.If collecting and compiling statistics, did you:
Determine all the sources of information?
Decide whether the data are reliable and valid?
Determine what is required to make the data meaningful (if it is not)?
2.If preparing a lessons learned document, did you:
Determine all the sources of information?
Prepare an outline?
Take steps to ensure its objectivity?
Submit it to senior management or other people who might use the information in the future?
3.When releasing people, did you determine the criteria to identify who should remain and who should
be redeployed?
4.When releasing equipment, facilities, etc., did you determine the criteria to identify what should
remain and what should be redeployed?
5.When recognizing and rewarding people, did you:
Determine whether to reward the entire team or select individuals or both?
Seek to be objective?
Appear fair and consistent?
Determine what recognition and rewards approaches are available to you?
Match the expectancy of recognition and reward with the type sought by the team or
individuals?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Part III
Project Management Enhancement
Chapter 19
Automated Project Management
Project management software can help you generate a project plan quickly, produce reports rapidly and
consistently, perform what if scenarios, identify inconsistencies with data, and reuse data from similar
projects. In short, todays software can go quite far in helping project managers be more effective in their job.
Using project management software, despite its obvious benefits, presents some challenges, too. Some of
these challenges include getting people to understand the purpose of the programs; reducing the learning
curve; increasing peoples receptivity to the output; producing reliable information rather than garbage in,
garbage out; and ensuring that the software program supports the project and not that the project supports the
software. Of course, you must also have the right hardware, operating software, and utilities on hand; the
software must be available at a reasonable price; and the licensing agreements must be fair.
You can use project management software to calculate early and late dates for each task and to determine the
critical path. You also can use software to allocate resources and calculate costs. In addition, you can use
word processing software to draft the statement of work and a spreadsheet program to estimate the hours
needed to complete the project.
Today, automated project management is going through immense changes. In the past, the scope was fairly
narrow; software was used to build schedules and calculate costs. But the advent of local area networks, Web
technologies, and mobile computing have expanded the scope of automated project management dramatically.
Currentand futureapplications will drastically change the way projects are completed and help ensure
their completion on time and within budget.
The discussion in this chapter visualizes the structure of present-day automated project management in the
form of a three-level pyramid, as shown in Exhibit 19-1.
Title
-----------
Exhibit 19-1Automated project management structure.
Personal Computing Systems
Building a program plan and doing risk assessment requires an automated project management package,
easiest on a personal computer. There are software packages at the minicomputer or mainframe level, but their
purchase or lease costs often are too high, the number of records insufficient, and the learning curve too long
for most limited-term projects. PC packages have the capabilities of larger systems but can be used at PC
level.
To choose a software package, consider your needs. A project manager might likely have the following
requirements:
Typical Software Needs and Wants
Cover a large number of tasks.
Assign multiple resources to a task and generate resource histograms for each resource and composite
ones.
Build a project repository.
Choose different types of network diagrams that provide multiple displays of information.
Create bar charts for multiple levels of the work breakdown structure and have the ability to tailor
and custom-build.
What the Software Wont Do
Many project managers, especially inexperienced ones, believe that the software makes or breaks a project.
Unfortunately, this belief is as unrealistic as the idea that a paintbrush makes a good painter or a pencil
makes a good writer.
Software is simply a tool to help you manage a project. It is an aid, an enablerif you use it correctly. It
will help you make decisions. It will help you communicate with people. It will help you track performance
and take corrective action, if necessary.
The software, however, will not do these things for you. You must make the decisions. You must
communicate. You must take action to get back on track. In other words, you must provide the leadership to
bring a project in on time and within budget. It happens because of you, not because of the software.
Many project managers have a tendency to blame the tool when things go awry. That serves only as an
excuse for poor project management. After all, as an old saying goes, good carpenters never blame their
tools.
If this sounds like preaching, it is, and heed the warning. Many a project has failed despite the availability
and use of the best project management software tools.
Define and change the logic relationships between tasks as well as the lag value for all network
diagrams.
Detect logic errors in network diagrams and identify the problem.
Establish a baseline, or target, schedule to measure against.
Generate graphics (e.g., pie charts and Pareto diagrams) using data from the repository.
Offer a common user interface that enables using other application packages easily.
Perform automatic resource leveling.
Perform what if scenarios to determine the impact of the cost and schedule milestones.
Provide calendaring capabilities that can be modified to suit specific circumstances.
Provide standardized reports and have ability to tailor and custom-build.
Use with other well-known word processing, database, and spreadsheet programs.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Assign a value to each software need to reflect its relative priority, as shown in Exhibit 19-2. Then collect
literature (e.g., sales brochures and magazine reviews), experiment with demos to see how well they satisfy
your needs, and interview subject matter experts. Finally, tally the results of your investigation and select the
best package based on the total score.
Exhibit 19-2. Sample software evaluation.
Requirements Weight
Package A Package B Package C
Value
Calculated
(Weight
Value) Value
Calculated
(Weight
Value) Value
Calculated
(Weight
Value)
Build a project
repository 3 2 6 (3 2) 3 9(3 3) 1 3 (3 1)
Add level number of
tasks 2 3 6 3 6 2 4
Select different types
of network diagrams 1 2 2 2 2 1 1
Provide standardized
re-ports and ability to
modify each one 3 1 3 1 3 3 9
Establish baseline
schedule 3 2 6 1 3 3 9
Create and tailor bar
charts 1 1 1 2 2 3 3
Define and change
logic relationships 2 1 2 3 6 2 4
Assign multiple
resources to tasks 3 1 3 2 6 1 3
Perform automatic
re-source leveling 3 1 3 3 9 3 9
Title
-----------
Grand Total 32 46 45
Remember that selecting the right package involves more than performing mechanical steps.
1.The agreement. Should you buy individual packages or multiple packages? If the latter, will you
receive a discount?
2.How easy is it to learn the package? Will the vendor provide basic training?
3.What type of support services are there? Is there a support line? Is there a charge for consultation? Is
it available 7 by 24, meaning seven days a week, twenty-four hours a day?
4.How long has the vendor been in business? If not long, what happens if it goes out of business after
you have invested in its product?
5.How well can the package be integrated with other popular applications and other projects (e.g.,
spreadsheets)? Will it require complex programming to share data?
6.How long is the learning curve? Will it help the team focus on the work rather than on satisfying the
needs of the software? In other words, is the software an enabler?
Once the package is selected and delivered, ensure that team members understand how to use the software and
provide the output. The need and level of understanding depends on the audience, of course. People working
directly on the project team (e.g., core team members) need a more detailed understanding of the capabilities
and outputs than senior management and the customer. Hence, tailor your presentation to reflect these
different needs.
Follow the same process when selecting risk management software. Identify the needs and wants in the
software package, find several popular packages, apply an objective approach to select the right software, and
ensure that people using the software are trained sufficiently. Some leading project management and risk
management software packages are shown in Exhibits 19-3 and 19-4.
Distributed Integrated System
Although there are excellent packages for project management, more often than not the computing
environment is distributed, whereby processing power is split among different levels in a systems
architecture. A distributed computing architecture is client/server. That is, some or all the application
processing may reside at the client, or PC, level, or be shared with a server, or be at a mini- or mainframe
computer level.
A typical scenario is for the project application software to reside on the client; the major processing and data
occur on the server. This architecture offers several advantages. First, users have a user-friendly interface
while simultaneously having access to considerably more power and data than on a PC. Second, hardware and
software cost less since the preliminary work is done at the client level. And third, data can be shared among
multiple users as well as provide uniform data management.
The client/server environment has substantially affected project management as a complementary or
supplementary tool for new technologies such as telecommuting, mobile computing, and groupware.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Telecommuting
Increasingly, people work on projects via personal computers in their homes. They provide their services and
expertise electronically. Telecommuting reduces the need for office space, plus saves time and commuting
dollars for the individual. It allows people to accomplish more in less time, thanks to fewer interruptions and a
flexible work schedule.
Project Management Methodologies
In some situations, projects can make use of a project management methodology, or PMM. Sometimes the
methodology is developed in-house; other times it is purchased from an outside firm. Whatever its origins, a
PMM offers several advantages. It provides a consistent, standardized approach for managing projects. It
sets the groundwork for compiling data. And it improves communications.
The PMM must be flexible in its application. It must also be documented and accessible, and it should be
supported via training and vendor assistance. Finally, it should present information clearly and concisely.
A PMM does not guarantee success; it takes leadership to get people to use the PMM. And this leadership
should come not from just the project manager but also from senior management. Commitment comes just
as much from the top as it does from the rank and file.
Some PMMs are stand-alone, meaning theyre not part of a much bigger methodologyfor example, the
Practical Project Management Methodology (P
2
M
2
) by Practical Creative Solutions and KLR Consulting.
Other PMMs are part of a much bigger methodology, such as Productivity Plus (P+) by DMR, which is
oriented toward software development.
There are challenges to telecommuting, and many of them are financial. Telecommuters must have
technological tools, including a personal computer (e.g., laptop or workstation), software (e.g., terminal
emulation), modem, printer, pager, and cellular phone. They also need training and perhaps technical support
to resolve connections problems and answer advanced application quieries. Project managers must ensure that
telecommuters have the current software, from project management to word processing.
There are also potential performance problems. There is corruption and other degradations of data associated
with transferring data across telephone lines. Slow transmission speed can increase costs, requiring
Title
-----------
installation of high bandwidth lines.
Exhibit 19-3. Leading project management software packages.
Package Description Contact
Primavera Project Planner
(copyright)
A comprehensive planning and control
package. It also provides e-mail and Web
publishing functionality. Considered
useful for medium to large projects.
Primavera Systems, Inc.
Two Bala Plaza
Bala Cynwyd, PA 19004-1586
(610) 667-8600
www.primavera.com
Results Management A suite of project management products,
of which Project Workbench plays a key
role. Project Workbench provides an
extensive project planning and control
system. Considered useful for medium to
large projects.
ABT Corporation
361 Broadway
New York, NY 10013-3998
(212) 219-8945
www.abtcorp.com
Microsoft Project for Windows A planning and controlling package that
generates standard and tailorable charts
and reports. Microsoft Project for
Windows works well with other Microsoft
products. Considered useful for small to
medium projects.
Microsoft Corporation
One Microsoft Way
Redmond, WA 98052-6399
(425) 635-7155
www.msn.com
CA-Superproject A project management package that is
very resource driven and provides
extensive graphics and reporting
capabilities. Considered useful for small to
large projects.
Computer Associates
International, Inc.
One Computer Associates Plaza
Islandia, NY 11788-7000
(800) 225-5224
www.cai.com
Project Scheduler 7 for
Windows
A project management package noted for
ease of use, resource handling capabilities,
and managing multiple projects.
Considered useful for small to large
projects.
Scitor Corporation
333 Middlefield Road
2nd floor
Menlo Park, CA 94025
(800) 533-9876
www.scitor.com
Mobile Computing
Like telecommuting, mobile computing is a result of advances in client/ server technology. Project team
members can be on the road and still contribute to deliverables. It gives team members the flexibility to work
at different locations, and enables them to work at a remote location and still provide timely results.
Exhibit 19-4. Leading risk management software packages.
Package Description Contact
Monte Carlo for Primavera Risk analysis software that is used with
Primavera Project Planner. It enables
determining the probabilities for
completing a project on schedule and
within budget.
Primavera Systems, Inc.
Two Bala Plaza
Bala Cynwyd, PA 19004-1586
(610) 667-8600
www.primavera.com
Rank-It Risk assessment software that enables
applying precedence diagramming (not to
be confused with precedence network
diagramming for schedules) for
identifying and ranking threats and
processes and associated controls.
Jerry Fitzgerald and Associates
506 Barkentine Lane
Redwood City, CA 94065-1128
(415) 591-5676
//ourworld.compuserve.com/
homepages/jerardra
Risk + Risk analysis software to use with
Microsoft Project for Windows. It enables
applying Monte Carlo simulation to
determine the probability to complete
tasks.
Program Management
Solutions, Inc.
553 N. Pacific Coast Highway
Suite B-177
Redondo Beach, CA 90278
(805) 898-9571
www.prog-mgmt.com
Total Risk An integrated risk management package
for monitoring and controlling risk by
creating a virtual data warehouse.
Redpoint Software, Inc.
One Cabot Road
Suite 190
Hudson, MA 01749
(508) 870-0070
www.rpsi.com
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Of course, there are challenges to mobile computing. The costs can be high. A mobile computing workforce
requires laptops, batteries, printers, software (e.g., applications, communications), CD-ROM attachments,
modems, adapters, docking stations, PCMCIA cards, and drivers.
There are other factors, too: skyrocketing communications costs, additional servers to handle demand,
training, and support to resolve technical problems. And there is the time and money to ensure the data
security and restrictive access to corporate networks.
Groupware Computing
Thanks to client/server architecture and the movement toward flatter organizational structures, groupware
computing enables the sharing of applications and data. Groupware is often not enterprise-wide; it is used
within a smaller organization, such as a department, work unit, or project. Its software components fall into
one of these categories:
Electronic mail and messaging over a network
Information sharing (e.g., document management)
Personal and group calendaring and scheduling
Real-time conferencing (e.g., electronic meetings)
Workflow (e.g., automation of common business functions)
To function in a groupware environment, team members need microcomputers or workstations, servers,
cabling, network devices, and software (which often includes two or more categories). It requires a
commonality of software and data.
Groupware improves the communciation and distribution of information. It capitalizes on trends toward
decentralization of computing, using mid-range and personal computer-based computing. But groupware also
presents its challenges. Like telecommuting and mobile computing, it requires support personnel to resolve
technical difficulties and answer inquiries. There must be a substantial initial investment in hardware and
software, as well as upgrade efforts and training. All this increases project costs and adds to flow time.
Title
-----------
Web Technology
The Internet is revolutionary technology that ties organizations and projects together. Many companies apply
Web technology in the form of intranets. The broad, primary difference between the Internet and an intranet
is that the latter uses a firewall, or server, to regulate or screen communicationshence, Internet technology
is used on a smaller, restricted basis.
The technology for using the Internet or an intranet is varied, but they share common requirements:
Workstation and browser for each user
Database servers
Expertise in SQL (structured query language), HTML (hypertext markup language), CGI (common
gateway interface), Java, and a database management system (e.g., relational)
Operating system at the workstation
Protocols (such as HTTP, TCP/IP) for communications
Web technology is truly an enabler of projects. It gives people access to information that was once difficult to
obtain. It has tools (browsers, HTML [hypertext markup language], etc.) that are relatively easy to use and
piggyback on an existing communications network and client/server infrastructures. Finally, it furthers
communication through e-mail or conferencing at relatively low cost.
Web Site Design
The enthusiasm for Web technology has hit just about every organization. Even medium-size projects are
building their own Web sites. Quite often, the Web pages of these sites appear cluttered, confusing, and
irrelevant.
To develop a Web page for your project, ensure that it is clear, concise, consistent, relevant, and simple.
Your Web pages should:
Follow a logical structure rather than appear as a hodgepodge of unrelated data.
Have text free of spelling and grammatical errors.
Keep hypertext and navigational links to a minimum and current.
Use color sparingly to emphasize main points and draw attention.
Use graphics, audio, and video to support the main focus of the site, not distract.
Use language that is familiar to everyone; define acronyms and jargon.
Use plenty of white space to increase readability and minimize bandwidth use.
Many projects establish Web sites. A Web site is what people inside and outside of the project access to send
or obtain information.
A project typically has one Web site for people access, which provides hypertext links to contents throughout
the site and navigational links to other pertinent sites. The information likely to be on a Web site is:
Cost and time estimates
Forms
Lessons learned from previous projects
Meeting schedules
Memorandums
Phone and contact listings
Procedures
Reports
Risk assessment
Schedules (bar and network)
Statement of work
Work breakdown structure
Taming the E-Mail Beast
In the past, it was not uncommon for project managers to find a pile of memorandums on their desks. Unless
they were masters at time management or could read quickly, they found themselves overwhelmed.
Today, the same challenge exists, except the memorandums are in electronic form. With the ease of using
e-mail, in many respects, the volume of memorandums has become worse.
To lessen the e-mail volume, emphasize that team members use e-mail etiquette, meaning:
1.Consolidate your messages to the receiver.
2.Ensure that the contents of the message move from major to minor points.
3.Include your name and/or organization on the message.
4.Keep the message to minimum length.
5.Ensure the receiver can print an attached file, if necessary.
6.Use good spelling and grammar.
To reduce the volume of e-mail you receive, you can:
Distribute a style guide on e-mail and guidelines for everyone on the project.
Establish a scheme for determining which messages are more important than others (e.g., topic or
person).
Set aside some time during the day to address messages.
Store messages for later reference onto a hard drive or floppy disk.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


In addition, the Web site can be the place to broadcast messages, enable access to databases, and distribute
updates to application software.
Despite the advantages of Web technology, it can add to the overall cost of a project. There are several issues
the project manager needs to address.
1.Content management. Setting up a Web site is one thing; keeping it current is another. There must
be someone on the team to refresh the site to ensure that its content and links stay meaningful.
2.Security. Especially for highly proprietary projects, project managers must restrict access and take
measures to prevent a virus from being downloaded. Firewalls, password protection, and encryption are
some ways, but they can be costly.
3.Support. Unless someone already has expertise in Web-related areas (e.g., HTML, Java), then the
project manager must train someone or hire the necessary support.
4.Infrastructure. The right technological infrastructure must be in place to use Web technology,
including ways to author and deploy documents for the site, hardware with sufficient capacity (e.g.,
sufficient RAM, processing speed), and software for assessing data created by legacy systems.
5.Productive use. With technological power at their fingertips, team members can be tempted to surf
the Internet, which can result in nonproductive time and effort as well as access to unrelated data and
software. Project managers must provide standards and guidelines for using this technology, especially
on highly visible, politically sensitive projects.
6.Sufficient bandwidth. Web technology goes beyond accessing and transferring text. It involves using
static images, audio, video, and data, all of which use bandwidth and challenge the overall capacity of
the supporting network infrastructure. Insufficient bandwidth can result in problems like long response
time at peak periods of usage.
7.Copyright laws. Placing documents on a Web site may be all right if generated internally, but if the
documents have been developed by another organization, issues of fair use and ownership arise.
8.User confidence. Although a key attraction of Web technology is its ease of use, many team
members find themselves gun-shy and may experience longer than usual learning curves. Training can
help resolve this issue.
The project manager needs to define his requirements upfront, look at the existing technological and
knowledge capabilities of his team members, and establish an infrastructure before deciding whether to take
Title
-----------
advantage of Web technology.
Videoconferencing
Videoconferencing once could occur only in a large facility equipped with a vast array of electronic gadgetry.
Today, with powerful personal computers and digital networking, videoconferencing takes place on a much
smaller scale. Many projects, especially ones with team members spread over a wide geographical area, are
increasingly using videoconferencing.
Videoconferencing offers many advantages. It encourages collaboration and communication, and encourages
real-time planning rather than relying on passive media like documentation and e-mail. Some major
capabilities of PC-based videoconferencing include:
Multipoint conferencing and point-to-point conferencing
Providing system diagnostics
Setting up address books
Sharing applications
Transferring files
Whiteboarding (e.g., electronic diagramming)
However, several challenges remain. The technology is immature, reflected in often blurry, ghostlike, and
jerky images. The sound often is not synchronized with the image. Other times, there are incompatibilities
between points owing to protocol differences. Sometimes, too, the transmission slows dramatically during
high usage periods, causing competition for bandwidth. Finally, preparing for videoconferencing can be
costly; the start-up costs alone can be up to three to four times the cost of a workstation.
To get started in videoconferencing, project managers should have a fully configured setup at a sending and
receiving site. The technology then includes:
Additional microcomputers for multiple-site conferences to manage interaction
Audio board supporting speaking and listening
Cabling
Digital camera
Microcomputer, preferably a Pentium
Microphone for group interaction; headset for individual interaction
Modem for phone lines
Software that provides control settings for audio and video quality; supports standard protocols (e.g.,
H.320 for ISDN [Integrated Services Digital Network] and H.324 for Plain Old Telephone Service
[POTS]); and, sharing applications, transferring data, and white-boarding
Videoboard
Project Automation: Recognizing the Limitations
A technological tool like a software package can make managing a project easier and the manager more
efficient and effective. However, its use does not guarantee success. Numerous projects have failed although
armed with top-notch software. Perry recognizes that a tool does not lead; nor does it define, plan, organize,
control, or close a project. People like Perry, and not some silver bullet, do that. Perry realizes, however, that
using the right software or other tooland using it righthelps clear the path to a successful project
outcome, and so he selects such tools carefully.
Questions for Getting Started
1.If looking for a project management software package, did you:
Define your requirements?
Determine how you will go about selecting the package?
Consider value-added issues like vendor support? Training? Warranties?
2.If looking for a risk management software package, did you:
Define your requirements?
Determine how you will go about selecting the package?
Determine the type of risk analysis and assessment approach to take?
Consider value-added issues like vendor support? Training? Warranties?
3.If you are working in a client/server environment, did you:
Determine the necessary hardware and software requirements?
Determine the necessary level of technical support?
Determine how to deal with issues related to hardware and software performance?
4.If team members are telecommuting, did you:
Determine the necessary hardware and software requirements?
Determine the necessary level of technical support?
Determine how to deal with issues related to hardware and software performance?
5.If team members are using mobile computing, did you:
Determine the necessary hardware and software requirements?
Determine the necessary level of technical support?
Determine how to deal with issues of data backup and recovery? Security? Compatibility of
hardware and software as well as distributing upgrades?
6.If team members are using groupware computing, did you:
Determine the necessary hardware and software requirements?
Determine the necessary level of technical support?
Determine ways to overcome hardware and software compatibility and upgrade problems?
7.If team members are using Web technology, did you:
Determine the necessary hardware and software requirements?
Elect to set up a Web site and determine its layout and contents?
Determine what ways to use Web technology (e.g., broadcast messages, access databases)?
Determine the necessary level of technical support?
8.If team members are using PC-based videoconferencing, did you:
Determine the necessary hardware and software requirements?
Determine the necessary level of technical support?
Determine the desired uses of the technology (e.g., sharing applications, whiteboarding)?
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Appendix
Case Study Work Breakdown Structure
1.0 Parties
1.1Bachelor Party
1.1.1Location
1.1.1.1Determine location
1.1.1.2Arrange for facilities
1.1.2Entertainment/Music
1.1.2.1Determine type of entertainment/music
1.1.2.2Arrange for entertainment/music
1.1.3Food/Beverage
1.1.3.1Determine type of food/beverage
1.1.3.2Arrange for food/beverage
1.1.4Party
1.1.4.1Conduct bachelor party
1.2Bridal Shower
1.2.1Location
1.2.1.1Determine location
1.2.1.2Arrange for facilities
1.2.2Entertainment/Music
1.2.2.1Determine type of entertainment/music
1.2.2.2Arrange for entertainment/music
1.2.3Food/Beverage
1.2.3.1Determine type of food/beverage
Title
-----------
1.2.3.2Arrange for food/beverage
1.2.4Party
1.2.4.1Conduct bridal party
1.3Reception
1.3.1Location
1.3.1.1Determine location
1.3.1.2Arrange for facilities
1.3.2Entertainment/Music
1.3.2.1Determine type of entertainment/music
1.3.2.2Arrange for entertainment/music
1.3.3Food/Beverage
1.3.3.1Determine type of food/beverage
1.3.3.2Arrange for food/beverage
1.3.4Reception
1.3.4.1Conduct reception
2.0 Stationery
2.1Invitations
2.1.1Bachelor party
2.1.1.1Determine whom to invite
2.1.1.2Select type of invitation
2.1.1.3Mail invitations
2.1.2Bridal shower
2.1.2.1Determine whom to invite
2.1.2.2Select type of invitation
2.1.2.3Mail invitations
2.1.3Reception
2.1.3.1Determine whom to invite
2.1.3.2Select type of invitation
2.1.3.3Mail invitations
2.1.4Wedding
2.1.4.1Determine whom to invite
2.1.4.2Select type of invitation
2.1.4.3Mail invitations
2.2Announcement of Engagement
2.2.1Select whom to contact (e.g., newspaper)
2.2.2Prepare announcement
2.2.3Mail announcement to newspapers
2.3Thank you cards
2.3.1Mail thank you cards for bachelor party
2.3.2Mail thank you cards for bridal shower
2.3.3Mail thank you cards for reception
2.3.4Mail thank you cards for wedding
3.0 Photography/Videography
3.1Engagement participants
3.1.1Determine portfolio
3.1.2Arrange for photographer
3.1.3Arrange for videographer
3.2Wedding portraits
3.2.1Determine portfolio
3.2.2Arrange for photographer
3.2.3Arrange for videographer
3.3Bachelor party
3.3.1Arrange for photographer
3.3.2Arrange for videographer
3.4Bridal shower
3.4.1Arrange for photographer
3.4.2Arrange for videographer
4.0 Gifts and Favors
4.1Bachelor party
4.1.1Collect gifts
4.1.2Safeguard gifts
4.1.3Determine favors
4.1.4Distribute favors
4.2Bridal shower
4.2.1Collect gifts
4.2.2Safeguard gifts
4.2.3Determine favors
4.2.4Distribute favors
4.3Reception
4.3.1Collect gifts
4.3.2Safeguard gifts
4.3.3Determine favors
4.3.4Distribute favors
5.0 Attire
5.1Bride
5.1.1Gown
5.1.1.1Select gown
5.1.1.2Tailor gown
5.1.2Headpiece
5.1.2.1Select headpiece
5.1.2.2Fit headpiece
5.1.3Veil
5.1.3.1Select veil
5.1.3.2Fit veil
5.1.4Hairstyle
5.1.4.1Select hairstyle
5.1.4.2Coordinate with hairstylist
5.1.5Makeup
5.1.5.1Determine cosmetic requirements
5.1.5.2Coordinate with cosmetician
5.2Groom
5.2.1Tuxedo
5.2.1.1Select tuxedo
5.2.1.2Tailor tuxedo
6.0 Transportation
6.1Wedding
6.1.1Bride and groom
6.1.1.1Identify limousine service to church
6.1.1.2Coordinate limousine service to church
6.1.1.3Identify limousine service to reception
6.1.1.4Coordinate limousine service to reception
6.1.2Guests
6.1.2.1Determine transportation requirements to church
6.1.2.2Coordinate transportation to church
6.1.2.3Determine transportation requirements to and from reception
6.1.2.4Coordinate transportation requirements to and from reception
6.1.2.5Arrange for valet service for church
6.1.2.6Arrange for valet service for reception
7.0 Fees
7.1Church service
7.1.1Pay for church service
7.2Parking
7.2.1Pay parking fees for wedding
7.2.2Pay parking fees for reception
8.0 Flowers
8.1Wedding
8.1.1Determine floral requirements
8.1.2Coordinate floral delivery
8.1.3Pay florist
8.2Reception
8.2.1Determine floral requirements
8.2.2Coordinate floral delivery
8.2.3Pay florist
9.0 Honeymoon
9.1Determine location for honeymoon
9.2Arrange for transportation to honeymoon location
9.3Arrange lodging for honeymooners
9.4Develop itinerary for honeymooners
9.5Depart for honeymoon
10.0 Guests
10.1Develop guest list
10.2Coordinate lodging
10.3Coordinate transportation (ground and air)
10.4Arrange for food and beverages
10.5Send letter of contact regarding services
11.0 Flowers
11.1License
11.1.1Prepare wedding license
11.1.2Coordinate with civil authorities
11.2Registry
11.2.1Set up registry at church
12.0 Rings
12.1Engagement ring
12.1.1Determine requirements from bride
12.1.2Determine requirements from groom
12.1.3Coordinate with jeweler
12.1.4Deliver ring to bride
12.2Wedding ring
12.2.1Determine requirements from bride
12.2.2Determine requirements from groom
12.2.3Coordinate with jeweler
12.2.4Deliver ring to bride
12.2.5Deliver ring to groom
13.0 Lighting
13.1Wedding
13.1.1Determine lighting requirements at church
13.1.2Coordinate lighting requirements at church
13.1.3Install lighting at church
13.2Reception
13.2.1Determine lighting requirements
13.2.2Coordinate lighting requirements
13.2.3Install lighting
14.0 Rules
14.1Wedding
14.1.1Identify bridesmaids
14.1.2Identify best man
14.1.3Identify maid of honor
14.1.4Identify flower girls
14.1.5Identify ring bearers
14.1.6Identify ushers
14.2Reception
14.2.1Identify who will be in receiving line
14.2.2Identify who will toast the newlyweds
15.0 Decorations
15.1Wedding
15.1.1Determine decoration requirements for church
15.1.2Coordinate set up of decorations at church
15.1.3Set up decorations at church
15.2Reception
15.2.1Determine decoration requirements at reception area
15.2.2Coordinate set up of decorations at reception area
15.2.3Set up decorations at reception area
16.0 Food/Beverages
16.1Reception
16.1.1Determine food requirements
16.1.2Coordinate food delivery
16.1.3Coordinate serving of food
16.1.4Determine alcoholic and nonalcoholic beverages
16.1.5Coordinate beverage delivery
16.1.6Coordinate serving of beverages
17.0 Church
17.1Contact church of choice regarding date, time, and number of attendees
17.2Coordinate with church specific requirements regarding service
17.3Conduct wedding
18.0 Cake
18.1Determine requirements for cake
18.2Submit requirements to bakery
18.3Arrange for delivery of cake to reception area
18.4Coordinate serving of cake
19.0 Rehearsals
19.1Wedding
19.1.1Coordinate with church the date and time of rehearsals
19.1.2Coordinate with wedding party the date and time of rehearsals
19.1.3Conduct first wedding rehearsal
19.1.4Conduct second wedding rehearsal
19.2Reception
19.2.1Coordinate with reception area owner the date and time of rehearsals
19.2.2Coordinate with receiving line and toaster the date and time of rehearsals
19.2.3Conduct first reception rehearsal
19.2.4Conduct second reception rehearsal
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Glossary of Project Management Terms
active listening
Genuinely hearing what the speaker says.
actual cost of work performed (ACWP)
The actual costs accrued for one or more tasks up to a specific point in time.
arrow diagram
A charting approach that uses nodes to represent events and arrows to describe the task between the
nodes.
assessing status
Determining how well the project has and will achieve its goals and objectives.
backward pass
Using the durations and dependencies in a network diagram, and moving from right to left through a
network diagram, beginning with the very last task, to calculate the late start and finish dates.
bar or Gantt chart
A charting approach that displays a list of tasks and, for each one, an accompanying bar to reflect the
flow time or duration.
baseline
Agreed-upon points of reference. In a project environment, baselines are set for schedule, budget, and
quality.
body language
The physical movements that account for 70 to 90 percent of our conversation (e.g., facial expressions,
body movements, posture, and eye movements).
budgeted cost for work performed (BCWP)
The estimated value of the work completed up to a specific point in time.
budgeted cost for work scheduled (BCWS)
The estimated value of the work scheduled.
Title
-----------
burdened labor rates
Rates that include the cost of fringe benefits (e.g., insurance, floor space, nonlabor overhead).
cause and effect diagram
A charting approach to identify the cause of a problem by identifying the interrelationships among the
four Ms: machines, manpower, materials, and methods.
change, corrective
Revisions that are nice to have but unnecessary.
change, high-priority
Revisions that demand immediate attention.
change, low-priority
Revisions that are addressed, if time permits.
change, major
Revisions that dramatically affect schedule, cost, or quality.
change, medium-priority
Revisions that do not require immediate attention.
change, minor
Revisions that do not fit in the major change category.
change board
The people responsible for classifying and prioritizing changes.
checkpoint review
A type of session held at specific times, usually after a red-letter date or significant event (e.g.,
completion of a major milestone).
checksheet
Document that records the frequency distribution of a number of incidents.
client/server environment
A computing architecture where some or all application processing may reside at the client (e.g.,
microcomputer level) or be shared with a server (e.g., mini- or mainframe computer level).
closing
A function of project management that involves compiling statistics, releasing people, and preparing
lessons learned. component A basic element of a system.
concept phase
The first phase of the project cycle. During this phase, the idea of a project arises and preliminary cost
and schedule estimates are developed at a high level to determine if the project is technically and
economically feasible.
constraint date
The time mandating that a task may have to begin or finish on or by a specific date.
contingency planning
Tentative responses to situations that have a good probability of occurrence and could impact project
performance.
control (n.)
A measure in place to mitigate, prevent, or correct the impact of a threat.
control chart
A diagram that identifies normal and anomalous situations specifically a variance from an average.
controlling
The function of project management that assesses how well a project meets its goals and objectives. It
involves collecting and assessing status, managing changes to baselines, and responding to
circumstances that can negatively impact project performance.
corrective action
Steps taken to get the project back on track.
cost variance
The difference between budgeted and actual costs.
critical path
One or more paths through the network diagram with tasks having zero float.
data flow
A diagramming technique showing the flow of data through a system.
defining
The function of project management that determines exactly the purpose and boundaries of a project. It
involves determining the overall vision, goals, objectives, scope, responsibilities, and deliverables of a
project.
delegating
Having a person act on behalf of another individual.
direct costs
Charges directly related to the building of a product (e.g., materials and specialized labor).
dissatisfier
Psychological desire that if not satisfied will negatively impact motivation.
distributed computing
A computing environment where processing power is split among different levels in systems
architecture.
diversity
A work environment tolerating a variety of backgrounds, including race, nationality, ethnicity, and
religion.
duration
The flow time of a task.
early finish date
The earliest time a task can be completed.
earned value
The integration of cost and schedule to determine the level of progress.
effectiveness
Whether a project is achieving its goals and objectives.
efficiency
Whether a project is consuming more or fewer resources than expected.
expectancy theory
Successful performance depends on the expectations of rewards, whether extrinsic or intrinsic, that a
person has.
expected time
Using the most likely, most optimistic, and most pessimistic variables to calculate the time anticipated
to complete a task.
feedback loop
The flow of information between the project manager, team members, the customer, and senior
management.
finish-to-finish dependency
The relationship between tasks whereby they must finish around the same time.
finish-to-start dependency
The relationship between tasks whereby an earlier activity, or predecessor, completes before the next
one, or successor, can begin.
fixed cost
Unalterable charge owing to changes in work volume (e.g., cost of facilities usage).
float, free
The time that an activity can slide without impacting the start date of its successor. Tasks with free float
appear on the noncritical path.
float, total
The time that an activity can slide without impacting the project completion date.
flowchart
Pictures and diagrams used for displaying processes and procedures.
form
Document that captures and communicates information; useful for providing audit trails.
formulation phase
A time in a project cycle when complete project plans are developed, which include a statement of
work, work breakdown structure, and schedule.
forward pass
Using durations and dependencies in a network diagram and moving from left to right through a
network diagram, beginning with the very first task to calculate the early start and finish dates.
Gantt chart
See bar chart.
global efficiency factor (GEF)
estimate A technique that incorporates nonproductive time into an estimate.
groupware computing
A computing environment allowing the sharing of applications and data.
hierarchy of needs
A psychological model of motivation developed by Abraham Maslow. It identifies peoples needs
according to this hierarchical order: physiological (food), safety (shelter), social (acceptance), esteem
(sense of importance), and self-actualization (becoming).
histogram
A graphical depiction of resources being or that have been utilized. The high points are called peaks
and low points are called valleys.
histogram, leveled
A histogram with the extreme peaks and valleys smoothed out.
histogram, unleveled
A histogram with an irregular shape, consisting of many peaks and valleys.
implementation phase
A time in a project cycle when the execution of the plan achieves the goals and objectives.
indirect cost
Charge not necessarily related to the building of a product (e.g., rent and taxes).
installation phase
A time in a project cycle when the final product is delivered to the customer.
Internet technology
Electronic technology that ties together communities throughout an organization.
intranet
Basically the same computing technology as that used to operate the Internet. The primary difference
between the two is that an intranet uses a firewall, or server, to regulate or screen communications.
item-by-item format procedure
Procedural documentation that contains a mixture of topics.
job enlargement
Increasing the number of tasks and responsibilities to perform on a job.
job enrichment
Structuring or assigning tasks and responsibilities to give a person the opportunity to actualize.
job rotation
Moving a person from one job to another to increase his overall awareness or exposure.
key project indicator (KPI)
Element of a project that contributes to its successful completion.
lag
The gap between the end of one task and the start of another.
late finish date
The latest time a task can be completed.
late start date
The latest time a task can begin.
leading
The only function of project management that simultaneously occurs when executing the other five
functions. It involves inspiring people to accomplish goals and objectives at a level that meets or
exceeds expectations.
lessons learned document
A medium for capturing the successes, challenges, and other information of a project.
maintenance factor
A dissatisfier, meaning that if not present to a sufficient degree, it will negatively impact motivation.
management estimate at completion (MEAC)
A combination of actual expenditures to date plus the remaining estimate to complete the project.
management reserve
A fund set aside to address unexpected costs, usually 3 to 5 percent of the total estimate for the project.
managerial level
The detail that is rolled up to higher levels for reporting purposes, usually the higher levels in the
work breakdown structure.
matrix structure
Resources from functional organizations that are shared with other projects.
mean
The average of the values for items in a group of data.
median
A position average at the midpoint for a frequency distribution.
meeting, ad hoc
A type of meeting that is held irregularly, often spontaneously, by team members.
meeting, staff
A type of session that is held regularly. All team members meet to receive information from the project
manager and to share additional data and insights.
memo
A brief document that should contain a date, subject title, addressee, signature block, purpose
statement; it should also answer the who, what, when, where, and why of a subject.
metrics
Tools and techniques to determine standards and track against them.
metrics, qualitative
Intangible, noncalibrated measures that are subjective.
metrics, quantitative
Tangible, calibrated measures that are objective.
Michigan studies
Management research that revealed two types of supervisory styles that can affect motivation:
production and employee centered.
milestone chart
The outlay on a Gantt chart that shows an icon or symbol for the occurrence of an event rather than a
bar for durations.
mobile computing
An information systems environment that enables team members to work at remote locations and
provide timely results.
mode
The value that appears most frequently in a series of numbers.
monitoring
Projecting into the future using past performance.
most likely estimate
The effort (usually in hours) to complete a task under normal or reasonable conditions.
most optimistic estimate
The effort to complete a task under the best or ideal circumstances.
most pessimistic estimate
The effort to complete a task under the worst conceivable circumstances.
motivational factor
A satisfier, meaning psychological desire that if addressed will positively impact performance.
Myers-Briggs type indicator
A psychological tool that identifies personality types based on the combination of four preferences:
extrovert versus introvert; sensing versus intuitive; thinking versus feeling; and judging versus
perceiving.
n Ach
A theory by David C. McClelland that found people have a need to achieve; the degree varies from
person to person.
narrative format procedure
Procedural documentation that communicates information in essay style.
network diagram
A chart displaying the logical relationships, or dependencies, between the tasks.
newsletter
A communications tool that keeps everyone abreast of important happenings and information. It serves
as a record of activities and accomplishments.
ninety (90) percent syndrome
90 percent of a project is completed, while the last 10 percent consumes most of the flow time.
nonburdened rate
The labor cost minus the cost of fringe benefits and overhead.
nonrecurring costs
A charge that appears only once (e.g., the purchase of equipment).
organizing
A function of project management that orchestrates the use of resources cost-effectively to execute
plans. It involves activities like assembling a team, clarifying relationships among parties, preparing
procedures, creating a project manual, and setting up project history files.
overrun
A positive value for total estimate-at-completion.
overtime labor rate
The charge that exceeds 40 hours per week, including time and a half and double time.
Pareto chart
A diagram that displays information to determine the potential causes of a problem.
participative management
A managerial approach for getting people involved by getting their input or feedback prior to making a
decision.
personality
The composite set of characteristics that make up a persons behavior.
planning
A function of project management that determines the steps needed to execute a project, assigns who
will perform them, and identifies their start and completion dates.
playscript format procedure
Procedural documentation that is similar to the sequential format. It is best used for procedures
involving two or more people.
precedence diagramming method
See program evaluation and review technique.
predecessor task
A task that precedes the occurrence of another task.
procedures
Documentation that provides detailed information on performing tasks.
product breakdown structure (PBS)
A delineation of the segments that constitute the final product or service.
productivity adjustment percent (PAP)
An estimating approach that applies the global efficiency factor on a larger scale. It involes applying an
overall productivity factor to the estimate for all tasks.
program evaluation and review technique (PERT)
A precedence diagramming method often used in nonconstruction environments (e.g., information
systems, pharmaceutical, and engineering industries). It uses three estimates to complete a task: most
likely, most pessimistic, and most optimistic.
project
A discrete set of tasks performed in a logical sequence to attain a specific result. Each task and the
entire project have a start and stop date.
project announcement
A memo that is widely distributed to announce the beginning of a project.
project communications
Establishing an infrastructure for disseminating information. It involves setting up the project office,
establishing and conducting appropriate meetings, giving effective presentations, and applying
interpersonal skills.
project cycle
The set of phases for completing a project.
project history file
A drawer in a filing cabinet, a directory on a personal computer, or file server that stores important
documentation.
project leadership
Inspiring people to perform in a manner that meets or exceeds expectations. project library A central
means for storing information.
project management
The tools, knowledge, and techniques used to lead, define, plan, organize, control, and close a project.
project management, classical approach
The use of three standard items (cost, schedule, and quality) to determine the success of a project.
project manager
the person who interacts with myriad people (e.g., sponsors, senior management, client, and team
members) to achieve the goals of a project. project manual A compendium of reference material for a
project.
project office
A central location established to manage a project.
quality
A service or product that satisfies the requirements and expectations of the customer.
reading people
Understanding the true motives of people by their actions.
recurring cost
Charge that appears regularly (e.g., long-term payments for facilities).
regular labor rates
The wage rate amount earned for less than or equal to 40 hours per week.
replanning
Redoing the project plan by making wholesale changes to cost, schedule, and quality.
report
A feedback mechanism to communicate information.
resource allocation
The distribution of materials, labor, etc., among tasks.
resource profile
A graphic display of the planned or actual use of one or more resources over the duration of one or
more tasks.
risk, acceptable
Allowing a threat to negatively affect a task on the non-critical path.
risk, external
A threat that originates from outside the scope of a project.
risk, internal
A threat that originates from inside the scope of a project.
risk, long-term
A threat that has an impact in the distant future.
risk, manageable
A threat that can be managed.
risk, short-term
A threat that has an immediate impact.
risk, unacceptable
A threat that negatively affects a task on the critical path.
risk, unmanageable
A threat that cant be managed.
risk acceptance
Accepting a risk rather than preventing or mitigating its impact.
risk adaptation
Taking measures that will mitigate a risks impact.
risk analysis
Identifying the components of a project, its risks, and the controls that should be or are in place.
risk avoidance
Taking action that will keep a risk from seriously impacting a project.
risk control
Deciding what action to take to prevent or mitigate the impact of a risk.
risk evaluation
Collecting information and determining the adequacy of controls.
risk identification
Recognizing the major elements of a project and their associated risks.
risk management
The process of identifying, analyzing, controlling, and reporting risk.
risk management, qualitative
An approach for managing risks that relies on judgments using criteria to determine outcomes.
risk management, quantitative
An approach for managing risks that relies mainly on statistical calculation to determine risks and their
probability of occurrence.
risk reporting
Informing team members and senior management of risks and their associated controls.
risk transfer
Letting someone else assume a risk.
rules of exchange
Communications etiquette.
satisfier
Psychological desire that, if addressed, will have a positive impact on performance.
scattergram
A graphic that shows the relationship between two variables. Sometimes called a scatter or correlation
chart.
schedule variance
The difference between planned and actual start and end dates.
scheduling
Logically sequencing tasks and then calculating start and stop dates for each one. The result of
scheduling is a diagram showing the logical sequence and the calculated dates.
scientific management
Identifying the most efficient tasks to perform a job, train people on them, develop standards to
measure performance, and separate work between management and workers.
scientific wildly assumed guess (SWAG)
estimate The most popular but most unreliable estimating technique. It requires making one-time
estimates to complete a task.
sequential format procedure
Procedural document that presents information.
social style matrix
A psychological or sociological tool that divides social styles and personal expectations based upon two
dimensions, assertiveness and responsiveness.
span of control
The number of people that a project manager can effectively manage.
standard deviation
The degree that each occurrence in a frequency distribution is located from the mean. It measures
dispersion.
start-to-start dependency
The relationship between tasks whereby two or more of them begin around the same time.
statement of understanding (SOU)
An informal statement of work.
statement of work (SOW)
An agreement between the customer and projects leadership on the exact definition of the project.
status review
A type of session to collect information to determine progress against cost, schedule, and quality
criteria set for a project.
steering committee
A group of people providing general oversight of and guidance of the project.
stretching
Assigning people to tasks that challenge them.
successor task
An activity that starts after the completion of a previous one.
sustaining phase
A time in a project life cycle where the product is under the customers cognizance and an
infrastructure exists to maintain and enhance it.
synergy
The output of a group, usually greater than the sum of the individual inputs.
task breakdown structure (TBS)
A top-down listing of tasks to build a part or perform an aspect of a service.
task force structure
A group of people assembled who are dedicated to completing a specific goal.
technical level
The lower level of the work breakdown structure that contains the actual tasks to perform, which will
be used for rollups when reporting to management.
telecommuting
People participating on projects using personal computers at their homes.
Theory X
A style of management that takes a negative view of human nature.
Theory Y
A style of management that takes a positive view of human nature.
threat
The occurrence of an event that negatively affects a project.
tracking
Looking at past performance.
trend chart
A graphical chart to display past performance and forecast results based upon the history.
underrun
A negative value for total estimate-at-completion.
variable cost
The charge that varies depending upon consumption and workload.
variance
The difference between what is planned and what has actually occurred up to a specific point in time.
videoconferencing
People interacting across geographical regions using video as the medium.
visibility wall or room
A place where all project documentation and other related information are showcased.
vision
An idea of a desired result in the future.
vision statement
A document describing what the project will achieve.
vulnerability
The inherent degree of weakness of components.
work breakdown structure (WBS)
A detailed listing of the deliverables and tasks for building a product or delivering a service. It is
top-down, broad-to-specific, and hierarchical.
work package level
The tasks or subtasks that will be used for assigning responsibilities, constructing schedules, and
tracking progress. It is the lowest level in the work breakdown structure.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


References
Books
Bennaton, E. M. On Time, Within Budget. New York: Wiley-QED, 1992.
Bennis, Warren, and Burt Nanus. Leaders. New York: Harper and Row, 1985.
Blake, Robert R., and Anne Adams McCanse. Leadership DilemmasGrid Solutions. Houston, Tex.: Gulf
Publishing, 1991.
Block, Robert. The Politics of Projects. New York: Yourdon Press, 1983.
Bramson, Robert. Coping with Difficult People. New York: Dell, 1981.
Briner, Wendy, Michael Geddes, and Colin Hastings. Project Leadership.Brookfield, Vt.: Gower, 1990.
Champy, James. Reengineering Management. New York: Harper Business, 1995.
DeMarco, Tom. Controlling Software Projects. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Yourdon press, 1982.
DeMarco, Tom, and Timothy Lister. Peopleware. New York: Dorset House Publishing, 1987.
Deming, W. Edwards. Out of the Crisis. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1986.
Donnelly, James H. Jr., James L. Gibson, and John M. Ivancevich. Fundamentals of Management. Plano,
Tex.: Business Publications, 1981.
Drucker, Peter F. Management. New York: Harper Colophon Books, 1985.
. The Practice of Management. New York: Harper and Row, 1982.
Duyn, J. Van. The DP Professionals Guide to Writing Effective Technical Communications. New York:
Wiley-Interscience, 1982.
FitzGerald, Jerry, and Arda F. Fitzgerald. Designing Controls into Competitive Systems, 2nd ed. Jerry
Title
-----------
FitzGerald and Associates: Redwood City, Calif., 1990.
Gannon, Martin J. Management: An Organizational Perspective. Boston: Little, Brown, 1977.
GAO. Assessing Risks and Returns: A Guide for Evaluating Federal Agencies IT Investment
Decision-making. GAO/AIMD-10.1.13, February 1997.
. Tax Systems Modernization, Statement of Gene L. Dodaro. GAO/T-AIMD-96-75, March 26, 1996.
. Tax Systems Modernization. GAO/AIMD-95-156, July 1995.
Garfield, Charles. Peak Performers. New York: Morrow, 1986.
Guidelines for Automatic Data Process Risk Analysis. FIPS Pub 65, August 1, 1979.
Harper, Ann, and Bob Harper. Skill-Building for Self-Directed Team Members. New York: MW Corporation,
1994.
Imai, Masaaki. Kaizen: The Key to Japans Competitive Success. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1986.
James, Muriel, and Dorothy Jongeward. Born to Win. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1987.
Juran, J. M. Juran on Leadership for Quality. New York: The Free Press, 1989.
. Juran on Quality by Design. New York: The Free Press, 1992.
Keirsey, David, and Marilyn Bates. Please Understand Me. Del Mar, Calif.: Prometheus Nemesis Book
Company, 1984.
Kerzner, Harold. Project Management, 5th ed. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1995.
Kliem, Ralph L. AHIs Productivity Sourcebook. New York: Alexander Hamilton Institute, 1988.
Kliem, Ralph L., and Irwin S. Ludin. DP Managers Model Reports and Formats. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.:
Prentice Hall, 1992.
. Just-In-Time Systems for Computing Environments. Westport, Conn.: Quorum Books, 1994.
. The Noah Project. Brookfield, Vt.: Gower, 1993.
. The People Side of Project Management. Brookfield, Vt.: Gower, 1994.
. Stand and Deliver. Brookfield, Vt.: Gower, 1995.
Kouzes, James M., and Barry Z. Posner. The Leadership Challenge. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1988.
McFarland, Dalton E. Management. Principles and Practices, 4th ed. New York: Macmillan, 1974.
Nirenberg, Jesse S. Getting Through to People. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1979.
Orsburn, Jack D., Linda Moran, Ed Musselwhite, and John H. Zenger. Self-Directed Work Teams.
Homewood, Ill.: Business One Irwin, 1990.
Productivity Management, 2nd ed. Boston: Keane, 1995.
Project Management Institute Standards Committee. A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge.
Upper Darby, Pa.: 1996.
Salton, Gary J. Organizational Engineering. Ann Arbor, Mich.: Professional Communications, 1996.
Scheduling Guide for Program Managers. Fort Belvoir, Va.: Defense Systems Management College, October
1986.
Schonberger, Richard J. Japanese Manufacturing Techniques. New York: The Free Press, 1982.
Stewart, Dorothy M. Handbook of Management Skills. Brookfield, Vt.: Gower, 1987.
Synnott, William R., and William H. Gruber. Information Resource Management. New York:
Wiley-Interscience, 1981.
Ulrich, David, and Dale Lake. Organizational Capability. New York: Wiley, 1990.
Magazines
Adhikari, Richard. Developers Benefit from a Process Blueprint. Software Magazine, March 1996.
Angus, Jeff. State Scraps IS Project. Information Week, March 24, 1997.
. Projects Get Kick Start. Computerworld, December 4, 1995.
Anthes, Gary. White House Ultimatum to Fed IS: Shape Up Systems or Lose Funding. Computerworld,
November 18, 1996.
Bach, James. Enough About Process: What We Need Are Heroes. IEEE Software, March 1995.
Barbour, Doug. What Makes a Good Project Fail. Object Magazine, September 1996.
Bartholomew, Doug. California Chaos. Information Week, May 6, 1996.
. Visual Schedules. Information Week, May 27, 1996.
Baum, David. New Technology Burnout? Datamation, November 15, 1995.
Bemowski, Karen. Leaders on Leadership. Quality Progress, January 1996.
. What Makes American Teams Tick? Quality Progress, January 1995.
Bennis, Warren. Managing People Is Like Herding Cats. Executive Book Summaries, March 1997.
. Why Leaders Cant Lead. Training and Development Journal, April 1989.
Betts, Mitch. IS Model Addresses Peopleware Issues. Computerworld, January 23, 1995.
Booker, Ellis. No Silver Bullet for IS Projects. Computerworld, July 11, 1994.
Bredin, Alice. Coping Without Boundaries. Computerworld, November 15, 1993.
Breen, Tim. Cultural Project Management. PM Network, September 1996.
Bridges, Linda. Wanted: Personable MIS and IS People. PC Week, September 12, 1996.
Brown, Connie S. Traveling the Road of Management. Network World, July 7, 1997.
Brownstein, Barry. Using Project Templates to Improve New Product Development. PM Network, March
1996.
Bukowitz, Wendi. In The Know. CIO, April 15, 1996.
Bullea, Christine V. Reexamining Productivity CSFs. Information Systems Management, Summer 1995.
Butler, Janet. Automating Process Trims Software Development Fat. Software Magazine, August 1994.
Cabanis, Jeannette. 1996 Project Management Software Survey. PM Network, September 1996.
Cafasso, Rosemary. Few IS Projects Come In On Time, On Budget. Computerworld, December 12, 1994.
. Satisfaction Guaranteed. Computerworld, November 20, 1995.
. Selling Your Soft Side. Computerworld, April 1, 1996.
Caldwell, Bruce. Taming the Beast. Information Week, March 10, 1997.
. Top Execs Take IT Reins. Information Week, March 17, 1997.
Calonius, Erik. Take Me to Your Leader. Hemispheres, April 1995.
Camerato, Carlos R. A Brazilian Project Management Case. PM Network, September 1996.
Caminiti, Susan. What Team Leaders Need to Know. Fortune, February 20,1995.
Campbell, Richard. Create Reports That Get Rave Reviews. Data Based Advisor, April 1996.
Capozzoli, Dr. Thomas K. Resolving Conflict Within Teams. Journal for Quality and Participation,
December 1995.
Carey, Jean. Successful Strategies for Estimating Projects. Tech Exec, March 1990.
Caudron, Shari. Strategies for Managing Creative Workers. Personnel Journal, December 1994.
Collins, Mary Ellen. High-Performance Teams and Their Impact on Organizations. Journal for Quality and
Participation, December 1995.
Companis, Nicholas A. Delphi: Not the Greek Oracle, but Close. PM Network, February 1997.
Cone, Edward. The Mess at IRS. Information Week, April 15, 1996.
Constantine, Larry L. Consensus and Compromise. Computer Language, April 1992.
. Dealing With Difficult People. Software Development, June 1997.
Corlini, James. A Trustworthy Cynic. Network World, October 14, 1996.
Covey, Stephen R. The Quadrant of Quality. Quality Digest, July 1995.
Crom, Steven, and Herbert France. Teamwork Brings Breakthrough Improvements in Quality and Climate.
Quality Progress, March 1996.
Crowley, Aileen. The New Metrics. PC Week, November 28, 1994.
Csenger, Michael. Staying the Course. Network World, July 7, 1997.
Currey, Jane. Project Sponsorship. PMI Network, March 1995.
Dancause, Richard. The Best of Both Worlds: Project Management with Consultants and In-House Staff.
PM Network, March 1997.
DeBono, Edward. Serious Creativity. Journal for Quality and Participation, September 1995.
Delavigne, Kenneth T. How to Distinguish the Masters from the Hacks. Quality Progress, May 1995.
Dellecave, Tom, Jr. Its About Time. Information Week, May 1, 1995.
Dern, Daniel. Tech Savvy Alone Wont Get You to the Top. Network World, May 26, 1997.
Dettmer, H. William. Quality and the Theory of Constraints. Quality Progress, April 1995.
DeVoe, Deborah. Project Updates Tracks Status. InfoWorld, October 10, 1995.
Dew, John. Creating Team Leaders. Journal for Quality and Participation, October/November 1995.
Dimancescu, Dan, and Kemp Dwenger. Smoothing the Product Development Path. Management Review,
January 1996.
Dinsmore, Paul C. Tom Peters Is Behind the Times. PM Network, September 1996.
. Lining Up the Corporate Ducks. PM Network, February 1997.
Due, Richard T. The Knowledge Economy. Information Systems Management, Summer 1995.
Durrenberger, Mark. Using Modern Project Management Tools to Build a Project Team. PM Network,
March 1996.
Durrenberger, Mark, Beebe Nelson, and Steve Spring. Managing the External Forces in New Product
Development. PM Network, March 1996.
Edgemom, Jim. Right Stuff: How to Recognize It When Selecting a Project Manager. Application
Development Trends, May 1995.
Engler, Natalie. Are Your Projects Under Control. Open Computing, August 1985.
. Break Out the Champagne, Its a Crisis. Computerworld, July 15, 1996.
. Coming Together. Computerworld, November 25, 1996.
. Stressed. Computerworld, April 15, 1996.
Fabris, Peter. Ground Control. CIO, April 1, 1996.
. The Water Cooler. CIO, October 15, 1996.
Fairley, Richard. Risk Management for Software Projects. Data Processing Digest, August 1994.
Fallen, Howard. The Implementation Coordinator: The Project Managers Ally. PM Network, May 1995.
Farkas, Charles M., and Suzy Wetlaufer. The Ways Chief Executives Lead. Review, May-June 1996.
Faulkner Technical Reports. ABT Project Workbench (MIC2.3840.020), February 1995.
. Primavera Project Planner. (MIC2.3840.100), February 1995.
. Project Management Software: Product Summaries. (509.0000.210), 1995.
Filipczak, Bob. It Takes All Kinds: Creativity in the Work Force. Training, May 1997.
Finekirsh, Sidney. Management by Measurement. Enterprise Systems Journal, January 1995.
Fleming, Quentin W., Joel M. Koppelman. Taking Step Four With Earned Value: Establish the Project
Baseline. PM Network, May 1995.
Fryer, Bronwyn. Separation Anxiety. Computerworld, November 14, 1994.
Garner, Rochelle. Family Feud. Computerworld, November 21, 1994.
Gibbs, Mark. Foraging in the Team Toolbox. Network World, January/February 1996.
Gilb, Tom. Software Metrics and the Result Method. American Programmer, December 1995.
Githens, Gregory D. Creating Value in Product Innovation. PM Network, March 1996.
Goff, Leslie. The Rise of the Generalist Guru. Client/Server Journal, June 1996.
Greenberg, Ilan. CA-Superproject Uses ODBC, Manages Multiple Projects. Info World, October 10, 1995.
Greene, Tim. Telecommuting Is More Than Hardware and Software. Network World, July 7, 1997.
Griffin, Jane. Building Bridges, Not Rivalries. PM Network, August 1996.
Hamilton, Neil. Reducing Project Risk: Defining Requirements. Enterprise Systems Journal, September
1995.
. Reducing Project Risk: Planning the Project. Enterprise Systems Journal, March 1995.
Harari, Oren. The Dream Team. Management Review, October 1995.
. Mind Matters. Management Review, January 1996.
Hare, Lynne B., Roger W. Hoerl, John Hromi, and Ronald D. Snee. The Role of Statistical Thinking in
Management. Quality Progress, February 1995.
Harmon, James F. The Supervisor and Quality Control Circles. Supervisory Management, March 1984.
Harrell, Clayton. Heuristic Planning Makes the Past Current. Electronic Design, April 15, 1996.
Harris, Richard M. Turn Listening Into a Powerful Presence. Training Development, July 1997.
Hart, Julie. Pesky Projects. Computerworld, April 11, 1994.
. Successful Systems Analysts: User Friendly. Computerworld, February 26, 1996.
Hauss, Deborah. Writing and Communications Remain Top Priorities. Public Relations Jounal, October
1995.
Hayes, Frank. IS Users Take Team Approach. Computerworld, October 23, 1995.
Hayes, Steve. Strategies for First-Project Success. Object Magazine, December 1996.
Heck, Mike. TurboProjects a Bargain for Midrange Planners. InfoWorld, September 23, 1996.
Heifetz, Ronald A., and Donald L. Laurie. The Work of Leadership, Harvard Business Review,
January-February 1997.
Henry, Bill. Measuring IS for Business Value. Datamation, April 1, 1990.
Hildebrand, Carol. All Together Now. CIO, March 1, 1996.
. Im Okay, Youre Really Weird. CIO, October 1, 1995.
. A Road Map for Risk. CIO, April 15, 1996.
Hill, Cheryl. 7 Tips for Effective International Writing. Competitive Edge, Winter 1996.
Holland, Neila A. Participative Management. Journal for Quality and Participation, September 1995.
Holpp, Lawrence. Teams: Its All That Planning. Training and Development, April 1997.
Horowitz, Alan S. Hey, Listen Up! Computerworld, July 1, 1996.
-. The Leader. Computerworld, October 28, 1996.
Inderman, Kurt. Behind the Lines. Internet Systems, July 1997.
Jaycox, Michael. How to Get Nonbelievers to Participate in Teams. Quality Progress, March 1996.
Jensen, Christian A. Project Managers On-Ramp to the Information Superhighway. PM Network, October
1996.
Johnson, Jim. Chaos: The Dollar Drain of IT Project Failures. Application Development Trends, January
1995.
Joint Logistics Commanders Joint Group on Systems Engineering. The Best Measurement Practices.
Managing Systems Development, July 1996.
Jones, Capers. Determining Software Schedules. Computer, February 1995.
. Hardware Problems of Software Measurement. Application Development Tools, May 1995.
Kay, Emily. Learning the True Value of Creativity. LAN Times, September 30, 1996.
Keane, John F. A Holistic View of Project Management. AS/400 Systems Management, June 1996.
Kelly, David. Project Management Morals. Client/Server Journal, date unknown.
Kern, Jill P. The Chicken Is Involved, But the Pig Is Committed. Quality Progress, October 1995.
Keuffel, Warren. Estimating Projects: Benefits of Dynamic Calibration. Software Development, May 1997.
Khan, Saad. Project Management Package Puts Highway Plan in Fast Lane. PC Week, October 17, 1994.
King, Julia. How to Build a Team with Basic Instinct. Computerworld, August 12, 1996.
. IS Reins in Runaway Projects. Computerworld, February 24, 1997.
King, Nelson H. On Time and On Budget. PC Magazine, April 11, 1995.
Kliem, Ralph L. Does Overtime Lead to Greater Productivity? Machine Design, April 7, 1988.
.Giving Presentations That Count. Leadership for the Front Lines, February 10, 1997 (No. 299).
. Keeping Warehousing Projects on Track. Auerbach, 1996 (21-10-13).
. Making Presentations That Command Attention. Machine Design, April 9, 1987.
. Memo-Writing Made Easy. Machine Design, August 20, 1987.
. Off to a Good Start. Data Training, November 1988.
. Office Memos: Writing Them Right. Supervisors Bulletin, September 30, 1991.
. Overview of Outsourcing. Faulkner Technical Reports, March 1992 (100.0000404).
. People: The Missing Ingredient of Effective Management. PM Network, January 1989.
. Project Proficiency. Computerworld, July 22, 1991.
. Project Success: More Than Just Technical Skill. High-Tech Managers Bulletin, August 25, 1988.
. Recognition Sparks Engineer Motivation. Machine Design, February 11, 1988.
. Take Me Out to the Project . . . PM Network, April 1997.
. Ten Keys to Productive Meetings. Data Communications, November 1986.
. Ten Steps to More Effective Speaking. Supervisors Bulletin, August 15, 1988.
. Ten Ways to Insure a Software Project. Tech Exec, September 1989.
. The Missing Ingredient. Machine Design, March 23, 1989.
. Total Quality Management. Faulkner Information Services, July 1994 (os2.4410.025).
. Using Project Management to Put Client/Server Projects Back on Track. Information Strategy,
Winter 1997.
. Using Project Management to Put Reengineering Back on Track. Auerbach, 1997 (41-10-25).
Kliem, Ralph L., and Harris B. Anderson. Teambuilding Styles and Their Impact on Project Management
Results. Project Management Journal, March 1996.
Kliem, Ralph L., and Rick Doughty. Making Software Engineering Project Managers Successful. Journal
of Systems Management, September 1987.
Kliem, Ralph L., and Jim L. Huie. Evaluating Controls in a System Under Development. Auerbach, 1995
(73-10-10).
Kliem, Ralph L., and Irwin S. Ludin. And Just-In-Time. Journal of Systems Management,
November/December 1995.
. Developing a Project Management Methodology for IS Environments. Managing System
Development, May 1996.
. Evaluating Project Performance. Auerbach, 1996 (35-10-60).
Knapp, Ellen. How to Keep Knowledge Management from Flickering Out. Computerworld (Leadersbip
Series), March 17, 1997.
Knutson, Joan. Proposal Management: Generating Winning Proposals, Part 2. PM Network, March 1996.
Koch, Christopher. Enter the Power Elite. CIO, May 1, 1996.
. The Bright Stuff. CIO, March 15, 1996.
Kramer, Matt. Two Schedulers Streamline Chore of Setting Up Meetings. PC Week, May 8, 1995.
Laabs, Jennifer J. Does Image Matter? Personnel Journal, December 1995.
LaMonica, Martin. Rumor keeps IS Shops Abreast of Project Development Risks. InfoWorld, October 23,
1995.
LaPlante, Alice. Sharing the Wisdom. Computerworld, June 2, 1997.
Latham, John R. Visioning: The Concept, Trilogy, and Process. Quality Progress, April 1995.
Lawton, George. Project Management Comes to the Internet. Software Magazine, April 1997.
Leitch, John, Gerard Burke, Dom Nieves, Michael Little, and Michael Gorin. Strategies for Involving
Employees. Journal for Quality and Participation, September 1995.
Levine, Harvey A. Risk Management for Dummies, Part 2. PM Network, April 1996.
. Risk Management for Dummies: Managing Schedule, Cost and Technical Risk and Contingency. PM
Network, October 1995.
Linden, Robert C., Sandy J. Wayne, and Lisa Bradway. Connections Make the Difference. HR Magazine,
February 1996.
Lynch, Dina. Unresolved Conflicts Affect the Bottomline. HR Magazine, May 1997.
MacKey, Wayne A., and John C. Carter. Measure the Steps to Success. IEEE Spectrum, June 1994.
Macomber, John D. You Can Manage Construction Risks. Harvard Business Review, March-April 1989.
Maglitta, Joseph. Learning Lessons from IRS Biggest Mistakes. Computerworld, October 14, 1996.
Maguire, Steve. Leading a New Team. Software Development, May 1997.
Malloy, Amy. Counting the Intangibles. Computerworld, June 1996.
Martin, James. The Enterprise Engineer. Computerworld (Leadership Series), September 18, 1995.
McCarthy, Jim. Better Teamwork. Software Development, December 1995.
McCune, Jenny C. Guarding Your Software and Your Company. Beyond Computing, June 1997.
McGee, Marianne K. Burnout. Information Week, March 4, 1996.
. Getting Credit for Your Career. Information Week, June 5, 1995.
. Outsourcing: Piecemeal Ticket. Information Week, July 14, 1997.
McGuinness, Charles. Web Enabled Applications: Beyond Document Sharing. Software Development,
February 1997.
Melymuka, Kathleen. The Vision Thing. Computerworld, December 12, 1994.
. Virtual. Computerworld, April 28, 1997.
. Hell According to Yourdon. Computerworld, March 31, 1997.
Menagh, Melanie. Virtues and Vices of the Virtual Corporation. Computerworld, November 13, 1995.
Menda, Kathleen. Projects, Not Structure, Define Future Workplace. HR Magazine, March 1996.
Milas, Gene. How to Develop a Meaningful Employee Recognition Program. Quality Progress, May 1995.
Minkiewicz, Arlene. Objective Measures. Software Development, June 1997.
Mintzberg, Henry. The Managers Job: Folklore and Fact. Harvard Business Review, March-April 1990.
Moran, John W., and Glen D. Hoffherr. Breakthrough Thinking. Journal for Quality and Participation,
September 1995.
Myers, Marc. Enterprise Project ManagementIt Can Be Automated. Network World, May 20, 1996.
Nakakoji, Kumiyo. Beyond Language Translation: Crossing the Cultural Divide. IEEE Software, November
1996.
Narney, Chris. Searching for True Knowledge. Network World, June 16, 1997.
Nelson, Bob, Lael Good, and Tom Hill. You Want Tomaytoes, I Want Tomahtoes. Training, June 1997.
Nixon, Kenneth L. Management versus Teams. The Quality Observer, December 1995.
Nunn, Philip. The Transition to Project Management in Manufacturing. PM Network, January 1995.
OConnell, Sandra E. The Virtual Workplace Moves At Warp Speed. HR Magazine, March 1996.
Pachter, Barbara. Manners Matter. Voyageur, 1996.
. Six Keys to Writing Better Business Letters. WFL, May 1996.
Panepinto, Joe. Maximize Teamwork. Computerworld, March 21, 1994.
Parr, William C., and Cheryl Hild. Maintaining Focus Within Your Organization. Quality Progress,
September 1995.
Paul, Lauren G. User Input: Key to Avoiding Failure in Client/Server Development Projects. PC Week,
January 25, 1995.
Pinto, Jeffrey. Power and Politics: Managerial Implications. PM Network, August 1996.
Powell, David. Group Communication. Communications of the ACM, April 1996.
Prencipe, Loretta. It Takes Calm to Diffuse Anger. Network World, March 17, 1997.
Putnam, Lawrence H., Jr. Using SEI Core Metrics. Application Development Trends, February 1995.
Racko, Roland. Debugging Meetings. Software Development, September 1997.
Radosevich, Lynda, and Cheryl Dahle. Taking Your Chances. CIO, April 15, 1996.
Richards, Dick. A Perspective for Visionaries. Journal for Quality and Participation, September 1995.
Rieciardi, Philip. Simplifying Your Approach to Measuring Performance. Quality Digest, August 1995.
Rifkin, Glenn. Leadership: Can It Be Learned? Forbes ASAP, April 8, 1996.
Roger, Will. Slow Road to Copyright Legislation. Interactive Week, July 21, 1997.
Rose, Kenneth H. A Performance Measurement Model. Quality Progress, February 1995.
Rubach, Laura. Downsizing: How Quality Is Affected As Companies Shrink. Quality Progress, April 1995.
Rubin, Howard A. Measurement Despite Its Promise, Successful Programs Are Rare. Application
Development Trends, January 1995.
Runcie, John F. The Ten Commandments of Leadership. Journal for Quality and Participation,
October/November 1995.
Runge, Larry. Starting from Scratch. Computerworld, October 24, 1994.
Saia, Rick. Harvesting Project Leaders. Computerworld, July 21, 1997.
Sauder, Lew. Team Players. AS/400 Systems Management, February 1997.
Saunders, Gary. Mapping Administrative Processes. Quality Digest, August 1995.
Schatz, Willie. The Burnout Syndrome. Client/Server Journal, August 1995.
. The Making of a Proper Project Manager. Client/Server Journal, October 1995.
Scheier, Robert L. Businesses Outsourcing More, But Less Thrilled With Results. Computerworld, July 21,
1997.
Schlosberg, Jeremy. Learning to Lead. Computerworld, September 9, 1996.
Schubert, Kathy. So Youve Been Asked to Be a Team Leader. Journal for Quality and Participation,
September 1995.
Schultz, Beth. A Real Virtual Network Corporation. Network World, January/February 1996.
. Collaboration by Design. Network World, January/February 1996.
Scully, John P. People: The Imperfect Communicators. Quality Progress, April 1995.
Seadle, Michael. Checkmating the Big Project Syndrome. Enterprise Systems Journal, April 1996.
Seesing, Paul R. Distributing Project Control Database Information on the World Wide Web. PM Network,
October 1996.
Seymour, Patricia. Integration of Process Tools Key to Advanced A/D. Application Development Trends,
February 1995.
Shacklett, Mary E. Computerizing the Home-Based Work Force. Enterprise Systems Journal, July 1997.
Sherman, Strat. Stretch Goals: The Dark Side of Asking for Miracles. Fortune, November 13, 1995.
Sims, Oliver. Why Projects Dont Get Off to a Good Start. Object Magazine, October 1996.
Smith, Jim. A Model for Ongoing Project Cost-Justification. Network World, February 5, 1996.
. Dont LookThe Project May Be Doomed. Systems Management, July 1995.
Smith, Max B. Project Management of Outsourcing and Other Service Projects. PM Network, October
1996.
Smolens, Peter. Mapping Out the Project Approval Process. Network World, November 25, 1996.
Sorgenfrei, Matt. Separating the Wheat from the Chaff. AS/400 Systems Management, January 1997.
Sparrius, Ad. You Cant Manage What You Dont Understand. Project Management Journal (reprint),
March 1994.
Stamps, David. Lights! Camera! Project Management. Training, January 1997.
Stein, Tom. It Stalls at Xerox, Perrier. Information Week, March 31, 1997.
Stewart, Thomas A. Planning a Career. Fortune, March 20, 1995.
Stokes, Stewart L., Jr. Rewards and Recognition for Teams. Information Systems Management, Summer
1995.
Stone, John A. How to Keep Control of Big Development Projects. Information Week, September 16, 1996.
Stuant, Anne. The Adaptable Workforce. CEO, March 1, 1995.
Sullivan, John, and Dave Yesua. The Internet: Faster, Better, Riskier. PM Network, October 1996.
Sullivan, Kristina B. Group Schedulers Run Gamut. PC Week, November 29, 1993.
Surveyer, Jacques. A Project Aide on CD-ROM. Information Week, February 12, 1996.
. Project Management Tools. Software Development, July 1997.
Tapscott, Don. Leadership for the Internetworked Business. Information Week, November 13, 1995.
Tate, Priscilla. Endangered Species: Project Methodologies. Client/Server Journal, October 1995.
Teal, Thomas. The Human Side of Management. Harvard Business Review, November-December 1996.
The, Lee. How to Hire a Consultant. Datamation, February 15, 1996.
. IS-Friendly Project Management. Datamation, April 1, 1996.
Toney, Frank. Good Results Yield . . . Resistance? PM Network, October 1996.
. What the Fortune 500 Know About PM Best Practices. PM Network, February 1997.
Venick, Martin. Managing Distributed Projects with Panache. Client/Server Journal, February 1996.
Venturato, Anthony P. Consultants: Judging the Potential for Excellence. PM Network, March 1997.
Wallace, Bob. Using the Internet for Project Management. Computerworld, October 14, 1996.
Walsh, Jeff. Primavera, Microsoft to Face Off on Project Management. InfoWorld, June 2, 1997.
Wang, Jim, and Ron Watson. Five Keys to Making Your OO Project Succeed. Object Magazine, November
1996.
Weissman, Steve. The Push and Pull of Getting Project Approval. Network World, October 23, 1995.
Weitz, Lori. New Features, Ease of Use Expanding Project Management Base. Client/Server Computing,
January 1994.
Weldon, David. Living on Shaky Ground. Computerworld, February 5, 1996.
. A Mutual Understanding. Computerworld, May 1, 1995.
Wells, Jess. Painless Dismissals. Software Development, May 1997.
Whitaker, Ken. Managing Software Maniacs. Computerworld, January 9, 1995.
White, Randall P. Seekers and Scalers: The Future Leaders. Training and Development, January 1997.
Wiegers, Karl. Metrics: 10 Trap to Avoid. Software Development, October 1997.
Wigglesworth, David C. Assess White-Collar Skills in the New Economy. HR Magazine, May 1996.
Wilde, Candee. The Limits of Power. Computerworld, January 16, 1995.
Williamson, Mickey. Getting a Grip on Groupware. CIO, Mrach 1, 1996.
Wilson, Linda. SWAT Teams: Life on the Edge. Computerworld, October 23, 1995.
Wolleat, J. R. Helluva Project. Computerworld, November 18, 1996.
Wood, Lamont. Perfect Harmony. Information Week, May 8, 1995.
Wyatt, Robert. How to Assess Risk. Systems Management, October 1995.
Yeack, William, and Leonard Sayles. Virtual and Real Organizations: Optimal Paring. PM Network,
August 1996.
Yourdon, Ed. Surviving a Death March. Software Development, July 1997.
Zawrotny, Stan. Demystifying the Black Art of Project Estimating. Application Development Trends, July
1995.
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.



Search Tips
Advanced Search

Project Management Practitioner's Handbook


by Ralph L. Kleim and Irwin S. Ludin
AMACOM Books
ISBN:0814403964Pub Date:01/01/98
Search this book:

Previous Table of Contents Next


Index
ad hoc meetings, 135
agenda, example of, 135
definition of, 132
arrow diagramming method (ADM), 79
automated project management, 185-199
distributed integrated system, 189-197
evaluation, process of, 188-189
needs and wants associated with, 185-186
three-level pyramid, structure of, 185-186
what software wont do, 187
backward pass, 76-78
definition of, 76
example of, 77
bar (Gantt) chart, 79-81
definition of, 79
example of, 79
roll-ups used in, 79-80
Bolton, Robert, 137-138
budget and cost calculations, 100-105
how to calculate, 102-104
kinds of costs, 100-102
management reserve in, 100
standard formulas of, 101
when too high, 104
Title
-----------
worksheet, example of, 103
burdened vs. nonburdened labor
rates, 102
burnout, 85
case study, ix, 9, 12-207
background of, 12
GWI organizational chart, 13
organizational structure in, 12-13, 16-17,96
project manager selection, 17-19
proposal, 13-14
work breakdown structure, 201-207
CA-Superproject, 191
checkpoint review meetings, 132-133
agenda example, 133
definition of, 132
checksheets, 155-156
definition of, 155
example, 156
classical vs. behavioral approaches, 6-7
close (phase of project management), 6
closure, 6, 175-182
lessons learned, 176-179
recognition and rewards, 179-180
releasing people, 179
component (risk), 108
concept phase, 8
conflict resolution, 139-140
constraint dates, 75
consultants, 43, 87-88
definition of, 43
steps, 87-88
contingency planning, 171-172
definitions of, 171-172
example, 172
contract employees, 43
control, 6
control charts, 155-156, 158
definition of, 155-156
example, 158
control (phase of project management), 6
controlling risk, 6, 109
core team, 62
critical path, 78
definition of, 78
example of, 78
data compilation, 162
Decide-X, 39
decision-making, 168
define (phase of project management), 6
difficult people, 140
direct vs. indirect costs, 101
documentation, 112-130
flowcharts, 117-118
forms, 118-122
history files, 125-126
memos, 123-124
newsletters, 124-125
procedures, 112-117
project library, 128
project manual, 126-128
reports, 122-123
earned value, 148-151
actual cost of work performed, 149
budgeted cost of work performed, 149
budgeted cost of work scheduled, 149
calculations, 149-151
definition of, 148
e-mail, 195
estimating, 63-70
benefits and challenges, 63
factors to consider, 69-70
obtaining, 68
reevaluating, 67
types of, 64-69
feedback loop, 11
finish-to-finish, 73-74
definition of, 73
example, 74
finish-to-start, 72-73
definition of, 72
example of, 73
fishbone chart, 161
fixed vs. variable costs, 101
float, 78-79
definition of, 78
example of, 78
types of, 78-79
flowcharts, 117-118
advantages of, 117
data flow example, 120
flow of control example, 119
pointers, 118
steps in creating, 119
forms, 119-122
guidelines for preparing, 121
qualities, 119
formulation phase, 8
forward pass, 75-76
definition of, 76
example of, 76
free float, 78-79
Gantt chart, 79-81
global efficiency factor (GEF), 64-65
groupware computing, 192
Hawthorne effect, 146
Herzberg, Frederick, 34
hierarchy of needs (Maslow), 35, 137
histograms, 83-87
definition of, 83
example of, 84, 85, 87, 90
leveled, 85
leveling, 86-87
unleveled, 84, 87
history files, 126
definition of, 126
requirements for maintaining, 126
steps for setting up, 126
implementation phase, 8
installation phase, 8
interpersonal skills, 136-140
active listening, 136-137
conflict handling, 139-140
people reading, 137-139
interviewing, 48
principles, 48
structured, 48
unstructured, 48
job enlargement, 36
job enrichment, 36
job rotation, 36
lag, 73
lead (phase of project management), 4
leadership, 22-27
conceptual understanding of, 22-24
factors that determine, 26
vs. management, 25
reasons for lack of, 24-26
theories of, 26
lessons-learned document, 176-179
advantages of, 176
definition of, 176
developing, 177, 179
outline of, 177
letter request, 14
management reserve, 100
managing project changes, 166-174
approved request form, 167
corrective-action challenges, 169-170
replanning, 170-171
requirements, 166-167
types of changes, 168-169
Maslow, Abraham, 35, 137
matrix structure, 16-17, 94-95
McClelland, David, 35
McGregor, Douglas, 35
mean,159,162
calculation of, 162
definition of, 159
median, 159, 162
calculation of, 162
definition of, 159
meetings, 132-134
agendas, 133-134
rules of conduct, 134
types of, 132
memos, 123-124
advantages of, 123
example of, 124
methodologies, 190
metrics, 152-165
actions for collecting data, 152-153
categories of, 152
steps in data collection and analysis, 153-162
Michigan studies, 35-36
Microsoft Project for Windows, 191
milestone bar chart, 80
definition of, 80
example of, 80
mobile computing, 44, 191
mode, 159, 162
calculation of, 162
definition of, 159
monitoring, 146
Monte Carlo for Primavera, 192
motivation, 34-38
by delegation, 36
by job enlargement, 36
by job enrichment, 36
by job rotation, 36
by participation, 36-37
by personal goal attainment, 37
by personality/task match, 37
by recognition, 37
by stretching, 38
theories of, 34-36
to enhance performance and participation, 34-38
Myers-Briggs type indicator, 137
n Ach theory (McClelland), 35
negotiating, 49
network diagram, 71-79
advantages of, 71
bad signs of, 72
definition of, 71
example of, 72
logic change example of, 89
other types of, 79-81
relationships/dependencies in, 72
newsletters, 124-125
advantages of, 124
distribution methods for, 125
issues in, 124-125
topics of, 125
organize (phase of project management), 6
outsourcing, 89
definition of, 89
steps in, 89
overtime, 85
Pareto charts, 155-156
definition of, 155
example of, 156
participation, 36
PDCA cycle, 154
performance assessment
assessment, 146-151
data validity and reliability, 145-146
methods of collection, 144
prerequisites, 144
personal behavior theorists, 26
personal goal attainment, 37
PERT. See program evaluation and review technique.
plan (phase of project management), 6
precedence diagramming method, 79
presentations, 134-136
types of, 135
steps in, 135-136
Primavera Project Planner, 191
probability (risk), 108
problem solving, 171
procedures, 112-117
definition of, 112
examples of, 114-117
key insights for preparing, 121
requirements in, 113
steps in, 113, 116-117
procedural formats, 113-117
item-by-item format, 113, 117
narrative format, 113-114
playscript format, 113, 116
sequential format, 113, 115
product breakdown structure, 59
productivity adjustment percent (PAP), 65
program evaluation and review technique (PERT), 66-69
benefits of, 67
calculation of, 66-67
key points of, 68-69
project, 4, 7-9, 90, 175-176, 178, 180-181
acceleration of, 90
definition of, 4
guidelines for the future, 180-181
information systems projects, 178
phases of, 7-9
reasons for success or failure of, 9-10,175-176
project announcement, 53-54
example of, 54
purposes of, 53-54
project library, 128
definition of, 128
steps of, 128
project management, 4-6, 10
classical vs. behavioral approaches, 6-7,10
definition of, 4
functions of, 4-7
introducing, 5
phases of, 8-9
project manager, 16, 18-20
characteristics of, 19
powers of, 20
skills of, 18-19
types of, 16
project manual, 126-128
advantages of, 127
steps in compiling, 127
table of contents example, 128
project office, 131-132
Project Scheduler 7 for Windows, 191
proposals, 13-14
components of, 13-14
types of, 14
quartiles, 160-161, 164
Questions for Getting Started
automated project management, 198-199
budget and costs, 104-105
case study, 21
change management, 173-174
closure, 181-182
documentation, 129-130
estimating, 70
interactions, 141-142
metrics, 163-165
resource allocation, 91
risk management, 111
scheduling, 81
statement of work and project announcement, 54-55
team organization, 99
tracking and monitoring, 151
vision and motivation, 45
work breakdown structure, 61-62
Rank-It, 192
recurring vs. nonrecurring costs, 101
regular vs. overtime rates, 102
reliability of data, 145-146
replanning, 170-171
prerequisites for, 170-171
reasons for, 170
reports, 122-123
characteristics of, 122
example of, 122
steps in, 123
request for information, 14
request for proposal, 14
resource allocation, 82-91
heuristics for, 83
histograms for, 83-85
level loading in, 84
steps in, 82-86
Results Management, 191
risk management, 106-111
categories of risk, 108
factors that increase risk exposure, 107
four-step process of, 106-107
key concepts in, 108-109
qualitative approach in, 109
quantitative approach in, 109
risk acceptance, 109
risk adaptation, 110
risk analysis, 106
risk avoidance, 110
risk control, 106
risk identification, 106
risk reporting, 106, 110
risk transfer, 110
ways to handle risk, 109-110
Risk+, 192
risk reporting, 106, 110
definition of, 106
example of, 110
roll-up bar chart, 79-80
definition of, 79
example of, 80
scattergrams, 155, 157
definition of, 155
example of, 157
scheduling, 71-81
definition of, 71
duration/flowtime in, 71, 73
group participation in, 77
logic of, 71
reasons for not doing, 74
resources for, 71
scope of, 71
tasks of, 71
time factor in, 71
scientific wildly assumed guess (SWAG), 64
scientific management (Taylor), 34
self-directed work teams, 98
situational contingency theorists, 26
social style matrix, 138
software (project management), 191
software (risk management), 192
staff meetings, 132, 134
agenda for, 132, 134
definition of, 132
standard deviation, 159-160, 163
calculation of, 163
definition of, 159-160
start-to-start, 73
definition of, 73
example of, 73
statement of work/statement of understanding, 46-53
answers to five Ws, 47
definition of, 47
example of, 50-52
flowchart of, 53
information contained in, 47
introduction for draft of, 48
outline of, 47-48
section descriptions and purposes of, 48-53
status data, 143-145
status review, 132-133
agenda example, 133
definition of, 132
sustaining phase, 8
SWAT teams, 97-98
task breakdown structure, 59
task force structure, 17, 93-94
Taylor, Frederick, 34
team building, 38-42
characteristics of, 40-42
style of, 39
team diversity, 42-43
team organization, 92-99
preliminary requirements of, 92-93
self-directed work teams, 98
SWAT team, 97-98
types of structure in, 93-95
virtual teams, 95, 97
telecommuting, 44, 189-190
Theory X and Y (McGregor), 35
threat (risk), 108
three-point estimating technique. See
program evaluation and review
technique.
total float, 78
total risk, 192
tracking, 146
trait theorists, 26
transactional analysis, 138
trend charts, 159-160
definition of, 159
example of, 160
two-factor theory of motivation (Herzberg), 34
validity of data, 145-146
variance, 147-151
actual to date, 147
cost variance, 147
definition of, 146
estimate at completion, 147
overrun, 147
schedule variance, 148
underrun, 147
videoconferencing, 196-197
advantages of, 196-197
capabilities of, 197
technology in, 197
virtual teams, 95, 97
visibility wall/room, 132
definition of, 132
pointers, 132
vision, 31-34
advantages of, 32
communicating, 32-33
definition of, 31
example of, 32
facilitating and expediting performance, 33-34
keeping focus, 33
vulnerability (risk), 108
WBS. See work breakdown structure.
web technology
key issues, 195-196
site contents, 194
site design, 194
work breakdown structure (WBS), 56-62
benefits of, 56-57
definition of, 56
developing, 56-61
80-hour rule, 58
examples of, 58-60
product breakdown structure, 59
reasons for failure of, 57
task breakdown structure, 59
work package level, 59
Previous Table of Contents Next
Products| Contact Us| About Us| Privacy | Ad Info | Home
Use of this site is subject to certain Terms & Conditions, Copyright 1996-2000 EarthWeb Inc. All rights
reserved. Reproduction whole or in part in any form or medium without express written permission of
EarthWeb is prohibited. Read EarthWeb's privacy statement.

You might also like